FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB Display Audio

 

Whether its providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicles heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know youll find the app an important extension of your Jeep brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play Store and enter the search keyword JEEP (U.S. residents only). 2020 GRAND CHEROK EE OWNER S MANUAL 2 0 2 0 G R A N D C H E R O K E E U. S. Canada DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNERS MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits rservs. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque dpose de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 2 0 _ W K _ O M _ E N _ U S C _ N T h i r d E d i t i o n This Owners Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. This Owners Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owners Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the drivers responsibility to comply with all local laws. This Owners Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation. WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................ 91 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................120 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 181 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 279 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 313 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 367 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 379 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................466 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................ 470 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2 2 INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............................11 Essential Information .................................. 11 Symbols ........................................................ 11 ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................11 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................12 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE VEHICLE USER GUIDE IF EQUIPPED ...............13 KEYS ......................................................................14 Key Fob......................................................... 14 IGNITION SWITCH ................................................17 Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition..................... 17 Vehicle On Message ................................... 19 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ...19 How To Use Remote Start ........................... 20 Remote Start Abort Message...................... 21 To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 21 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle ..................................... 21 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle................................................... 21 Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped ............................................... 22 General Information .................................... 22 SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 22 Key Programming ....................................... 23 Replacement Keys ...................................... 23 Irregular Operation ...................................... 24 General Information .................................... 24 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED..... 25 To Arm The System ..................................... 25 To Disarm The System ............................... 25 Rearming Of The System............................. 26 Security System Manual Override .............. 26 Tamper Alert................................................. 26 DOORS................................................................... 26 Manual Door Locks...................................... 26 Power Door Locks ....................................... 27 Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry .......... 27 Locking The Doors With One Or More Doors Open .................................................. 31 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ................ 31 Auto Relocking If Equipped .................... 31 Child-Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors ............................................... 31 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS IF EQUIPPED... 32 Programming The Memory Feature............ 33 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory ............. 33 Memory Position Recall............................... 33 SEATS ....................................................................34 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped ............................................... 34 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 36 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped .............................................. 37 Heated Seats If Equipped ...................... 39 Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped ........ 40 HEAD RESTRAINTS .............................................41 Supplemental Active Head Restraints Front Seats............................................... 41 Adjustment Rear Seats............................ 43 Head Restraint Removal Rear Seats...... 43 STEERING WHEEL.................................................44 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column If Equipped .............................................. 44 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column If Equipped ............................................. 45 Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped ....... 45 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3 MIRRORS ..............................................................46 Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped ....... 46 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped .............................................. 46 Outside Mirrors ........................................... 47 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped ............................................... 47 Power Mirrors .............................................. 47 Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped ............................................... 48 Heated Mirrors If Equipped .................... 48 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse

(Available With Memory Settings Only) If Equipped ............................................... 48 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 49 EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................49 Headlight Switch ......................................... 49 Multifunction Lever ..................................... 50 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) If Equipped ............................................... 50 High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 50 Automatic High Beam If Equipped .......... 51 Flash-To-Pass .............................................. 51 Automatic Headlights If Equipped .......... 51 Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 51 Headlights On Automatically With Wipers........................................................... 51 Headlight Delay............................................ 52 Lights-On Reminder .................................... 52 Fog Lights If Equipped ............................. 52 Turn Signals ................................................. 52 Lane Change Assist If Equipped ............. 52 Battery Saver ............................................... 52 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 53 Courtesy Lights ............................................ 53 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ............ 54 Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 54 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped ........... 56 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 57 HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED ........... 57 CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 58 Automatic Climate Controls Overview ....... 58 Climate Control Functions........................... 64 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 65 Operating Tips ............................................. 65 WINDOWS ............................................................. 67 Power Window Controls .............................. 67 Auto-Down Feature ..................................... 67 Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection .................................................... 68 Reset Auto-Up .............................................. 68 Window Lockout Switch .............................. 68 Wind Buffeting ............................................ 69 3 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED ....................69 Opening Sunroof.......................................... 69 Closing Sunroof ........................................... 70 Wind Buffeting ............................................ 70 Sunshade Operation ................................... 70 Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 70 Venting Sunroof Express ......................... 70 Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 70 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED .......................................71 Opening Sunroof.......................................... 71 Closing Sunroof ........................................... 72 Wind Buffeting ............................................. 72 Opening Power Shade................................. 72 Closing Power Shade................................... 73 Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 73 Venting Sunroof Express ......................... 73 Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 73 HOOD ....................................................................73 To Open The Hood ....................................... 73 To Close The Hood....................................... 74 LIFTGATE................................................................74 Opening ........................................................ 74 Closing.......................................................... 75 Power Liftgate If Equipped ..................... 75 Cargo Area Features ................................... 77 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED..........79 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 95 SAFETY 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4 4 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .................................................. 79 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 81 Using HomeLink........................................ 82 Security......................................................... 82 Troubleshooting Tips ................................... 83 General Information .................................... 83 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........................................84 Storage ......................................................... 84 Cupholders .................................................. 86 Electrical Power Outlets ............................. 86 Power Inverter If Equipped ...................... 88 Sunglasses Bin Door .................................. 89 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED ............89 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER........................................91 Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 92 SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER................................93 SRT Instrument Cluster Descriptions ......... 94 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls ........................................................ 95 Oil Change Reset If Equipped ................. 97 Display Menu Items..................................... 97 Instrument Cluster Display Messages ....... 98 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ... 99 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped) ...............................105 TRIP COMPUTER ................................................106 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................107 Red Warning Lights ...................................107 Yellow Warning Lights ...............................110 Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................114 Green Indicator Lights...............................115 White Indicator Lights ...............................116 Blue Indicator Lights..................................117 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II ....118 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity .............................................118 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ............................119 SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 120 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 120 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ... 121 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 131 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) If Equipped .............................................131 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation ...................................................136 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................................ 138 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 142 Occupant Restraint Systems Features .... 142 Important Safety Precautions...................143 Seat Belt Systems .................................... 144 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)... 152 Child Restraints ........................................162 Transporting Pets .................................... 177 SAFETY TIPS ..................................................... 177 Transporting Passengers ..........................177 Exhaust Gas .............................................178 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle ..........................178 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle ........................ 180 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE ................................... 181 Automatic Transmission............................181 Normal Starting ........................................182 If Engine Fails To Start .............................184 Cold Weather Operation

(Below 22F Or 30C) .........................185 After Starting ..............................................185 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED ....... 185 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS NON-SRT ........................................................ 185 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SRT .................................................................. 186 PARKING BRAKE .............................................. 186 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .......................... 188 Ignition Park Interlock ...............................189 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System .......................................................189 Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode .......................189 EightSpeed Automatic Transmission .....190 SPORT MODE IF EQUIPPED.......................... 196 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .................. 196 Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/

Precautions If Equipped ........................196 Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/

Precautions If Equipped ........................196 Shift Positions ............................................197 Shifting Procedures ...................................198 Quadra-Drive II System If Equipped ......200 QUADRA-LIFT IF EQUIPPED...........................200 Description.................................................200 Air Suspension Modes...............................203 Instrument Cluster Display Messages .....203 Operation....................................................203 SELEC-TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED .....................205 Selec-Terrain Mode Selection...................205 Instrument Cluster Display Messages .....205 SELEC-TRACK IF EQUIPPED (SRT) ...............206 Custom .......................................................206 Active Damping System.............................207 Launch Control...........................................207 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ONLY IF EQUIPPED.........................................208 POWER STEERING .............................................208 STOP/START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED............209 Automatic Mode.........................................209 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop .....................................................210 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode...........................................................210 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........................................................211 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........................................................211 System Malfunction...................................211 5 SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED ................... 211 To Activate ................................................. 212 To Set A Desired Speed ...........................212 To Vary The Speed Setting ....................... 212 To Accelerate For Passing ........................ 213 To Resume Speed .................................... 213 To Deactivate ............................................ 213 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF EQUIPPED ................................................. 214 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation ...................................................215 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)...........................................................216 To Activate/Deactivate.............................. 216 To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................216 To Cancel ...................................................217 To Turn Off ................................................. 217 To Resume ................................................. 217 To Vary The Speed Setting ....................... 218 Setting The Following Distance In ACC .... 219 Overtake Aid...............................................220 ACC Operation At Stop............................... 221 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........221 Display Warnings And Maintenance ........222 Precautions While Driving With ACC......... 223 General Information ..................................225 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode ..........................................................226 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6 6 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED .................................................. 228 ParkSense Sensors ...................................229 ParkSense Display.....................................229 ParkSense Warning Display......................231 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........231 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System........................................................231 Cleaning The ParkSense System..............232 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....232 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED .................................................. 233 ParkSense Sensors ...................................234 ParkSense Display.....................................234 ParkSense Warning Display......................237 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........237 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System........................................................237 Cleaning The ParkSense System..............238 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....238 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ................................................... 239 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park Assist System .........................240 Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display......................................241 Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display......................................245 LANESENSE IF EQUIPPED ............................250 LaneSense Operation................................250 Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................251 LaneSense Warning Message ..................251 Changing LaneSense Status.....................253 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .............253 REFUELING THE VEHICLE .................................255 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ........256 VEHICLE LOADING ...........................................256 Certification Label .....................................256 TRAILER TOWING ..............................................258 Common Towing Definitions .....................258 Trailer Hitch Classification ........................260 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Non SRT .....................261 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) SRT .............................262 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal

(Summit Models) If Equipped................262 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal

(SRT Models) If Equipped ......................263 Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................264 Towing Requirements ...............................264 Towing Tips ................................................267 SNOW PLOW.......................................................268 RECREATIONAL TOWING

(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ......................... 269 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle........................................................ 269 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models........................................................ 270 Recreational Towing Quadra-Trac I

(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................270 Recreational Towing QuadraTrac II

/QuadraDrive II Four-Wheel Drive Models........................................................ 270 DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 273 On-Road Driving Tips .................................273 Off-Road Driving Tips.................................274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................... 279 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR IF EQUIPPED.... 279 General Information ..................................283 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................................... 284 Replacement Bulbs ..................................284 Bulb Replacement ..................................... 287 FUSES.................................................................. 290 General Information ..................................290 Underhood Fuses ......................................290 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 296 Run Flat Tires .............................................296 Jack Location .............................................296 Spare Tire Stowage ...................................297 Preparations For Jacking ..........................297 Jacking Instructions ..................................297 Road Tire Installation ................................302 JUMP STARTING ................................................ 302 Preparations For Jump Start .....................303 Jump Starting Procedure...........................304 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY IF EQUIPPED .................................................. 305 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 306 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 306 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 308 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 309 Two-Wheel Drive Models ...........................311 Four-Wheel Drive Models ..........................311 Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped ......312 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE SRT ............ 312 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS) ................................................................ 312 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................313 Scheduled Servicing Non-SRT ..............313 Scheduled Servicing SRT ......................317 ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................323 3.6L Engine ................................................323 5.7L Engine ................................................324 6.2L Supercharged Engine .......................325 6.4L Engine ................................................326 Checking Oil Level ....................................327 Adding Washer Fluid .................................327 Maintenance-Free Battery .......................327 Pressure Washing......................................328 DEALER SERVICE ..............................................328 Engine Oil ..................................................328 Engine Oil Filter .........................................330 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ..........................330 Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................333 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............335 Body Lubrication .......................................336 Windshield Wiper Blades .........................336 Exhaust System ........................................340 Cooling System ..........................................341 Brake System ............................................344 Automatic Transmission............................345 Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................346 Transfer Case ............................................347 7 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 347 TIRES ................................................................... 347 Tire Safety Information ............................ 347 Tires General Information ....................352 Tire Types ...................................................356 Spare Tires If Equipped ........................ 357 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................359 Tire Chains and Traction Devices Non-SRT ................................................. 360 Tire Chains and Traction Devices SRT ......................................................... 361 Tire Rotation Recommendations .............361 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................. 362 Treadwear .................................................. 362 Traction Grades ......................................... 362 Temperature Grades .................................363 STORING THE VEHICLE ................................... 363 BODYWORK........................................................ 363 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......363 Body And Underbody Maintenance.......... 364 Preserving The Bodywork..........................364 INTERIORS ......................................................... 365 Seats And Fabric Parts.............................. 365 Plastic And Coated Parts...........................365 Leather Parts .............................................366 Glass Surfaces .......................................... 366 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8 8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IDENTIFICATION DATA ...................................... 367 Vehicle Identification Number ..................367 BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................. 367 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 367 Torque Specifications................................367 FUEL REQUIREMENTS....................................... 368 3.6L Engine ..............................................368 5.7L Engine ................................................369 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine .......369 Reformulated Gasoline ..........................369 Materials Added To Fuel ..........................369 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................370 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ......................................................370 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .............................................370 MMT In Gasoline........................................371 Fuel System Cautions................................371 Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................371 FLUID CAPACITIES NON-SRT ...................... 372 FLUID CAPACITIES SRT ............................... 373 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS NON-SRT........... 374 Engine ........................................................374 Chassis ......................................................376 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS SRT ....................377 Engine ........................................................377 Chassis ......................................................378 MULTIMEDIA UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................379 CYBERSECURITY ...............................................379 UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................380 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4 Settings ..............................381 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings..............396 SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION...........412 Safety Guidelines.......................................412 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ..............413 Introduction................................................413 Radio Mode................................................414 Media Mode ...............................................422 Phone Mode...............................................430 OFF-ROAD PAGES IF EQUIPPED...................441 Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................442 Vehicle Dynamics ......................................442 Suspension ................................................443 Pitch & Roll.................................................443 Accessory Gauges......................................444 Selec-Terrain If Equipped ......................444 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED ................................................. 445 Radio Operation......................................... 445 Media Mode...............................................445 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED .................................................. 445 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device................................................. 445 Using This Feature..................................... 446 Second Row USB Charging Port ............... 446 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT

(RSE) SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED......................... 447 Getting Started .......................................... 447 Dual Video Screen ..................................... 448 Blu-ray Disc Player..................................448 Play Video Games......................................450 Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio.................................... 450 Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System........................................................ 451 Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control If Equipped .............................................452 Headphones Operation ............................. 453 Controls ...................................................... 453 Replacing The Headphone Batteries .......454 Accessibility If Equipped........................ 454 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty.....................................................454 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ............................................................. 457 Regulatory And Safety Information...........457 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ........................................................ 459 Introducing Uconnect ................................459 Get Started.................................................459 Basic Voice Commands.............................460 Radio ..........................................................460 Media..........................................................460 Phone .........................................................461 Voice Text Reply If Equipped .................461 Climate .......................................................462 Navigation (4C NAV) If Equipped...........462 Siri Eyes Free If Equipped ..................462 Do Not Disturb ...........................................462 Android Auto If Equipped ...................463 Apple CarPlay If Equipped .................464 General Information ..................................464 Additional Information...............................465 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..........................................466 Prepare For The Appointment...................466 Prepare A List.............................................466 Be Reasonable With Requests .................466 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................466 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................467 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........467 In Mexico Contact ......................................467 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............467 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ................467 Service Contract .......................................467 9 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 468 MOPAR PARTS................................................... 468 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 468 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. ......................................468 In Canada...................................................468 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 469 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10 10 INTRODUCTION Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to operate this vehicle, read the Owners Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, dont overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information. This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording If Equipped. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer. When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts, and care about your satisfaction. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Essential Information Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment. The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Symbols Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to Warning Lights and Messages in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle. ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully. 11 1 Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up. Rollover Warning Label 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12 12 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. WARNING!

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13 VEHICLE USER GUIDE IF EQUIPPED Access your Owners Information right through your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system (if equipped). To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is required. Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4inch Display Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon NOTE:

Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available while the vehicle is in motion. radio Features/Benefits Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen 2 Pre-Installed Features Your User Guide Updated in real-time Touchscreen convenience Enhanced search and browsing capability Robust NAV application (if equipped) Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-

Maintenance schedules and information ites category Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary Icon and symbol glossary Available when and where you need it Warranty information Customizable interface Crucial driver information and assistance:

Multilingual Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warranty information and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding your vehicle. Theres no app to download, no phone to connect and no external device needed for playback. Plus, its updated throughout the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date. Operating Instructions Warranty Information Fluid Level Standards Maintenance Schedules Emergency Procedures 911 Contact and More TIP:

When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the future. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14 14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYS Key Fob Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature (if equipped). NOTE:

The key fobs wireless signal may be blocked if the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device. This may result in poor performance. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE:

With ignition on and the vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled. Key Fob 1 Liftgate Button 2 Unlock Button 3 Lock Button 4 Remote Start Button 5 PANIC Button Key Fob With Emergency Key In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow. To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate. All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and the security alarm will arm

(if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry located in Doors in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to Uconnect Settings located in Multimedia for further programmable information. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry located in Doors in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked. Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote Control The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE:

Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-

ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-

tion. Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other hand. 2 Emergency Key Removal 1 Emergency Key Release Button 2 Emergency Key 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16 16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emergency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal. Programming Additional Key Fobs Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer. NOTE:

Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle. Request For Additional Key Fobs NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. WARNING!

Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode. Key Fob Battery Replacement 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the +

sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together. Emergency Key Removal Separating Case With A Coin 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17 Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE:

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks. NOTE:

Black Keys (6.4 L) must be replaced with Black Keys and Red Keys (6.2 L) must be replaced with Red Keys. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

1. 2. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. 2 NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. IGNITION SWITCH Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several operating modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18 18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:

If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch. The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes:

OFF The engine is stopped Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.) are still available Some electrical devices are available All the electrical devices are available ACC Engine is not started ON/RUN Driving position START The engine will start WARNING! (Continued) Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

(Continued) CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. START/STOP Ignition Button WARNING!

1 OFF 2 ACC 3 ON/RUN 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19 NOTE:

Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Vehicle On Message When opening the driver's door with the ignition in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message will display Ignition Or Accessory On in the cluster. NOTE:

The power window switches and power sunroof

(if equipped) will remain active up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition is in OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19 Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. 2 CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m). The Remote Starting system also activates the Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above 80F (26.7C), the optional heated seats, and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40F

(4.4C). Refer to Seats in this chapter for further information. NOTE:

How To Use Remote Start PANIC button not pushed 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20 20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-

matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range. WARNING!

Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-

tion of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off. System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (time out) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The vehicle must be manually started with a push of the START/STOP ignition button after two consecutive time outs. All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

Gear selector in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) Battery at an acceptable charge level Ignition in STOP/OFF position Fuel level meets minimum requirement Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated WARNING!

Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-

tion of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21 Remote Start Abort Message NOTE:

The following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

Remote Start Cancelled Door Open If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. The park lamps will turn on and remain on Remote Start Cancelled Hood Open during Remote Start mode. Remote Start Cancelled Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The instrument cluster display message stays active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15 minute cycle. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle 2 Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm

(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button. NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry feature, the message Remote Start Active Push Start Button will display in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition button. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22 22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. NOTE:

The Auto Comfort system can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect system. For more information on Comfort System operation, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23 CAUTION!

CAUTION!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23 Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position. 2 NOTE:

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine. After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Key Programming Key fob programming is performed at an authorized dealer. Replacement Keys NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24 24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Irregular Operation The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine. NOTE:

A key fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key. During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no 1. This device may not cause harmful cause interferencia perjudicial y interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25 2. Perform one of the following methods to NOTE:

lock the vehicle:

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals:

The horn will pulse The turn signals will flash cluster will flash To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the OFF position. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless ignition system is OFF. Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone. Refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further informa-

tion. Push the lock button on the key fob. To Disarm The System The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

Push the unlock button on the key fob. Grasp the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in

"Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information. Place the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the system. The vehicle security light in the instrument 3. If any doors are open, close them. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security alarm. Use of the door key cylinder when the alarm is armed will sound the alarm when the door is opened. 2 The vehicle security alarm remains armed when the power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button on the key fob. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door from the inside, the alarm will sound. If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the liftgate, the vehicle security alarm is disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked unless Unlock All Doors 1st Press is selected in the Passive Entry settings. When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26 26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm, regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five seconds between cycles, up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active and the vehicle security alarm will rearm itself. Security System Manual Override The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock. NOTE:

Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the vehicle security alarm. Tamper Alert If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. DOORS Manual Door Locks The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. WARNING!

For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27 WARNING! (Continued) Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors. Power Door Lock Switch The drivers door will unlock automatically if the keys are found inside the car when the door lock button on the trim is used to lock the door. NOTE:

NOTE:

If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless signal may get blocked, and the drivers door may not unlock automatically. At the third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key is inside. If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock. If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob. Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicles key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27 Passive Entry may be programmed on/off;

refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The key fob may not be able to be detected by 2 the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fobs wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the vehicle. Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach (low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for whichever time duration is set between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps. If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm the security alarm. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28 28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock From The Driver Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry. There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:

A lock request is made by a valid Passive NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the drivers door unlock preference setting (Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press). Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Entry key fob while a door is open. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open. When the vehicle security alarm is in pre-arm or armed status and the liftgate transitions from open to closed. When the liftgate transitions from open to closed and remote start is active. When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE:

If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front drivers door handle. To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29 NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:

The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs. Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors. There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle. To Lock The Vehicles Doors And Liftgate With one of the vehicles Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29 NOTE:

After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. 2 If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the key protection described in

"Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/

functional. The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicles interior door panel. Push The Door Handle Button To Lock NOTE:

DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s). DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30 30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. NOTE:

If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open with the handle and no key fob is required. If the vehicle is locked, and the liftgate is unlocked by using Passive Entry, the vehicle doors will remain locked (unless Unlock All Doors 1st Press is selected in the Passive Entry settings). The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked) must be locked using the lock button on the key fob, the Passive Entry lock button, or the lock buttons on the interior front door panels. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location 1 Electronic Liftgate Release 2 Lock Button Location To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located on the outside liftgate door handle. NOTE:

The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. 1. 2. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31 La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks after the following sequence of actions:

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. 2. All doors are closed. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Locking The Doors With One Or More Doors Open If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock. 3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in PARK. 4. Any door is opened. Auto Relocking If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/

disabled in the Uconnect Settings. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31 Child-Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system. To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. 2 Child-Protection Door Lock Function 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32 32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:

When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-

tion. After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-

tion), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle. NOTE:

Always use this device when carrying children. After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for effective engagement by trying to open a door with the internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be sure to check that there is no one left inside. DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS IF EQUIPPED Your key fob can be programmed to recall the same positions when the unlock button is pushed. This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the following features:

Driver seat NOTE:

Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory position 2. Be sure to program the radio presets prior to programming the memory seats. The memory setting switch is located on the drivers door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:

The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function. The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. WARNING!

Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped) Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). Side mirrors equipped) Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if A set of desired radio station presets Memory Switch 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33 Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Place the vehicles ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets). 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch. 4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will display which memory position has been set. NOTE:

Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile. Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock button on the key fob. NOTE:

Before programming your key fobs you must select the Memory Linked To Fob feature through the Uconnect system settings. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. To program your key fobs, perform the following:

1. Place the vehicles ignition in the OFF position. 2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2. 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch. 4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. Memory Profile Set (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster. 5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE:

Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob. Memory Position Recall 2 NOTE:

If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will be displayed in the instru-

ment cluster display. To recall the memory settings using the memory switch, push memory button

(1) or (2) on the memory switch. To recall the memory settings using the key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1 or 2. A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing any of the seat adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and telescopic steering column (if equipped) will stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34 34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. WARNING!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment Some models may be equipped with a manual front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. Adjustment Bar While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

WARNING!

Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature If Equipped To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into place. 2 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is parked. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Recline Lever Fold-Flat Passenger Seat 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36 36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) WARNING!

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. WARNING!

Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever. To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room. NOTE:

Rear Seat Release NOTE:

Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat-

back to fold down easily. 1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat. Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled. Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right outboard seat belt buckled. Rear Seat Recline 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37 2. Fold the rear seat completely forward. Rear Seat Folded NOTE:

You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape. To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position. WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle

(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. Power Adjustment (Front Seats) If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight-way power driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37 2 Power Seat Switches 1 Seatback Switch 2 Seat Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch; the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38 38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seats path. Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support. Power Lumbar Switch Easy Entry/Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the vehicles ignition in the OFF position. When you place the vehicles ignition in the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the vehicles ignition in the ACC or RUN position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39 The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile. Refer to Driver Memory Settings If Equipped in this chapter for further information. NOTE:

The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further informa-

tion. Heated Seats If Equipped On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and seatbacks. WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-

tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-

ical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat or seat-

back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Front Heated Seats The front heated seat control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39 You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The indicator arrows in the touchscreen buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will return the user to the radio screen. 2 Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on. Press the heated seat button time to turn the LO setting on. a second Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements off. NOTE:

Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40 40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-

tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-

ical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat or seat-

back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console. You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF. Push the switch once to turn the HI setting on. LO setting on. Push the switch a second time to turn the heating elements off. The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it. WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-

tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-

ical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat or seat-

back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO. Push the switch a third time to turn the Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41 The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO. Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat off. NOTE:

The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. WARNING!

All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41 Supplemental Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints (AHR) are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The AHRs will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic. When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR. This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42 42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) Adjustment Button For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head. Active Head Restraint (Tilted) NOTE:

The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer. In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to Occupant Restraint Systems/Resetting Active Head Restraints

(AHR) in Safety for further information. WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-

stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision. Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43 WARNING! (Continued) Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed. Adjustment Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position, but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised. After returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head restraints are not removable. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-

stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. 2 Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied. Center Head Restraint Release Button Returning Rear Head Restraint The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it. Head Restraint Removal Rear Seats The center head restraint can be adjusted when occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go by pulling upward. Then, push the release button at the base of the post while pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44 44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:

For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information. WARNING!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occu-

pant compartment. ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-

stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. STEERING WHEEL Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column If Equipped This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column If Equipped This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column. NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, you can use your key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed positions. Refer to Driver Memory Settings If Equipped in this section for further information. WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45 Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm. The heated steering wheel control button is located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on. Push the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element off. NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46 46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-

tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-

ical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. NOTE:

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the drivers rear view. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror Button 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47 CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions:

Full forward position Full rearward position Normal position Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts. Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side door trim panel. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47 The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. 2 Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Selection 2 Mirror Direction Control Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Settings Feature. Refer to Driver Memory Settings If Equipped in Getting To Know Your Vehicle in this chapter for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48 48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position. The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L

(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position. If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag. Power Folding Mirror Switch Automatic Power Folding Mirrors When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors are closed, and the doors are locked). If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If the exterior mirrors were manually folded, they will not automatically unfold. NOTE:

The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory. The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multi-

media for further information. Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:

The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds. To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them by pushing the button (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position. Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to Climate Controls in this chapter for further information. Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Settings Only) If Equipped Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49 NOTE:

The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun. 1. Fold down the sun visor. Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the visors. Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on automatically. 3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. 4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun blockage. NOTE:

The sun visor blade can also be extended while the sun visor is against the windshield for addi-

tional sun blockage through the front of the vehicle. Illuminated Vanity Mirror GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49 EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights, and fog lights (if equipped). 2 Headlight Switch To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50 50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-

light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses. Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Multifunction Lever Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) If Equipped Non-SRT Vehicles The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low intensity) come on whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or the parking brake is engaged. NOTE:

If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate. The DRLs function may be disabled through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further informa-

tion. SRT Vehicles The DRLs (bright intensity) come on whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving. High/Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51 Automatic High Beam If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. NOTE:

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off by selecting ON under Auto High Beam within your Uconnect settings, as well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer. Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released. Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the A (auto) position. When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the A (auto) position. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51 NOTE:

The engine must be running before the head-

lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode. Parking Lights And Panel Lights To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position. Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable feature. When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute, and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52 52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Refer to Windshield Wipers And Washers in this chapter for further information. Lights-On Reminder If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound when the drivers door is opened. Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control. NOTE:

When your headlights come on during the daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-

matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Headlight Delay To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON position. NOTE:

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if the headlight switch is left in the A (auto) position when the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Fog Light Operation Battery Saver The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is selected. Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-

tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. Lane Change Assist If Equipped Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. To protect the life of your vehicles battery, load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53 If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off. This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicles battery. Courtesy Lights NOTE:

Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON. The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a second time. If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off. INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down, to the last (off) detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out. Courtesy Lights Front Map/Reading Lights If Equipped The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console. Front Map/Reading Light Switches GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53 2 Front Map/Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry key fob is pushed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54 54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Ambient Light If Equipped The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor and center console area. during the day. Rotating the dimmer control up to the second detent, the furthest position up, turns on the courtesy lights. This feature is known as Dome On. Multifunction Lever Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation. Ambient Light Dimmer Controls The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the instrument cluster display, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the first detent up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required Dimmer Control WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to Rear Window Wiper/

Washer in this section. Windshield Wiper Operation 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55 CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the park position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph

(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent). GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55 2 Intermittent Wiper Operation Windshield Washer Operation NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph

(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer, push on the end of the lever

(toward the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off. NOTE:

As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56 56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle. NOTE:

The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive. NOTE:

Wiper delay position three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system. NOTE:

The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield. Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:

Low Ambient Temperature When the igni-

tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32F (0C). Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-

mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57 Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit condi-

tions (mentioned previously) exist. Rear Window Wiper/Washer The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever. Rear Wiper/Washer Control Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position. NOTE:

As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57 If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the park position. HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED The headlight washers are integrated into the windshield washer and can be operated by the multifunction lever when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlights are turned on. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. To use the headlight washers, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and release it. The headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the windshield washers will spray the windshield and the windshield wipers will cycle. NOTE:

After turning the ignition switch and headlights on, the headlight washers will operate on the first spray of the windshield washer and then every eleventh spray after that. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58 58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel below the radio. Automatic Climate Controls Overview Uconnect 4 With 7inch Display Automatic Climate Controls 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59 2 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4inch Display Automatic Climate Controls 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60 60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Control Descriptions Icon MAX A/C Button Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. Description NOTE:

The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen. A/C Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Recirculation Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61 Icon Faceplate Auto Button Touchscreen Auto Button GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61 Description AUTO Button Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by adjusting the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to Automatic Operation in this section for further information. 2 Front Defrost Button Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62 62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Description Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passengers temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. NOTE:

The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. Faceplate Blower Knob Touchscreen Blower Buttons Blower Control Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63 Icon Description Mode Control Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

2 Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Mix Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64 64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Icon Climate Control OFF Faceplate Button Climate Control OFF Touchscreen Button Description Climate Control OFF Button Press and release the OFF button on the touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the faceplate, to turn the Climate Control system ON/OFF. Climate Control Functions NOTE:

A/C (Air Conditioning) The A/C (Air Conditioning) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows. If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed. If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-

ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser. MAX A/C MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65 Recirculation In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable

(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Automatic Operation 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. 2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65 NOTE:

Operating Tips It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to the Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode. NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. 2 Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.

 

 

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66 66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vacation/Storage Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur. CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Cabin Air Filter The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed. Operating Tips Chart WEATHER Hot Weather And Vehicle Interior Is Very Hot Warm Weather Cool Sunny CONTROL SETTINGS Set the mode control

, to on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Adjust the controls as needed to achieve comfort. Turn on and set the mode control to the position. Operate in position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67 WEATHER Cool & Humid Conditions Cold Weather CONTROL SETTINGS Set the mode control to turn on position and to keep windows clear. Set the mode control to the position. If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to the position. WINDOWS Power Window Controls The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 2 Auto-Down Feature The driver door power window switch and the front and rear passenger door window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch down for half a second and release. The window will go down automatically. To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch briefly. To open the window part way (manually), push the window switch down briefly and release. Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. If equipped, the key fob may also be used to raise or lower vehicle windows while the ignition is in the OFF position. Refer to Keys in this chapter for further information. NOTE:

The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is program-

mable. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multi-

media for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68 68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection Lift the window switch up for a short period of time and release; the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. NOTE:

If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpect-

edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the window manually. WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing. Reset Auto-Up Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button (the indicator light on the button will turn on). To enable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button again (the indicator light on the button will turn back off). Window Lockout Switch 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING! (Continued) In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. 2 Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. Opening Sunroof Express Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Open. During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70 70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. Closing Sunroof Express Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof. Manual To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. Wind Buffeting Pinch Protect Feature Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. NOTE:

The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. NOTE:

If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. Venting Sunroof Express Push and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console. The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console. CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches WARNING!

Opening Sunroof GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71 2 The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort stop position and a full open position. The comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting. Express Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to the comfort stop position. Push the switch rearward and release it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. This is called Express Open. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72 72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Mode To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop position. Push and hold the switch rearward again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again. NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening. Closing Sunroof Express Close Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the sunroof in a partially open position. Manual Close Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will close from any position and stop at full closed position. Releasing the switch while the sunroof is in motion will stop the sunroof in a partially open position. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Opening Power Shade The sunshade has two programmed positions:

half open and full open positions. When operating the sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the half open position regardless of express or manual open operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue on to full open position. Express Open Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it within one-half second, the sunshade will open to the half open position and stop automatically. Push and release the switch again from the half open position and the sunshade will open to the full open position and stop automatically. During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the sunshade in a partially open position. Manual Open Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the sunshade will open to the half open position and stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch again and the sunshade will open to the full open position. Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73 Closing Power Shade Pinch Protect Feature Sunroof Maintenance If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot be closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half open position will first automatically close the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing. Express Close Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunshade will close automatically. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the sunshade in a partially open position. Manual Close Push and hold the switch forward and the sunshade will close and stop at full closed position. Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open position. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. NOTE:

If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. Venting Sunroof Express Push and release the "Vent" button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73 Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. HOOD 2 To Open The Hood To open the hood, two latches must be released. 1. Pull the release lever located underneath the drivers side of the instrument panel. Hood Release 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74 74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left and lift the hood. WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. LIFTGATE Opening The liftgate can be opened from inside the vehicle using the power liftgate button on the overhead console. The liftgate can be opened from the outside using the key fob or the electronic liftgate release. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate The liftgate may be released in several ways:

Key fob Outside handle Button on overhead console The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release the liftgate. Safety Latch Location To Close The Hood 1. Pull down on the center of the hood until it falls on its own. 2. Confirm that both the primary and secondary latches are engaged. If only the secondary latch is engaged, open the hood 12 inches (30 cm) from the engine compartment and apply enough force to engage both the primary and secondary latches. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75 NOTE:

If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in Uconnect, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic release on the liftgate. If "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in Uconnect, only the liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release on the liftgate. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Passive Entry/Lock Button Location 1 Electronic Liftgate Release 2 Lock Button Location GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75 The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button, located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing the button will only close the liftgate. This button cannot be used to open the liftgate. NOTE:

The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-

tronic liftgate release. 2 Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the electronic liftgate release

(refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry located in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information), or by pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate. NOTE:

Use the power door lock switch on either front door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate. WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. Closing To manually close the liftgate, grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate the lowering of the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate is partially closed and the momentum will fully close the liftgate. To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry lock button located next to the outside handle release will lock the vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76 76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:

When using the liftgate button on the key fob to open the liftgate while the vehicle is locked, only the liftgate will unlock leaving the other doors to remain locked. Closing the liftgate will not re-lock the liftgate. The lock button on the key fob, or the Passive Entry lock button must be pushed to re-lock. When using the Passive Entry button to open the liftgate, and the vehicle doors unlock (if Unlock All Doors 1st Press is selected in the Passive Entry settings), the liftgate and vehicle doors must be locked using the lock button on the key fob, the Passive Entry lock button, or the lock buttons on the interior front door panels. The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate. NOTE:

When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in

"Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

In the event of a power malfunction to the lift-

gate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-

gate trim panel. If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate func-

tionality. WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22F (30C) or temperatures above 150F (65C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power lift-

gate switches. If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-

matically reverse to the closed or open posi-

tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance. There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position. If the liftgate is not fully open, push the lift-

gate button on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate. If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77 If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the lift-

gate motor will disengage to allow manual operation. If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and the lift-

gate must be opened or closed manually. WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77 Two additional storage bins are located under the load floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor and attach the tether strap

(attached to the bottom of the load floor) to the liftgate opening. 2 Cargo Area Features Cargo Storage Bins There are up to four removable storage bins located in the rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area. NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the storage bin on that side will not be available. Rear Storage Bin Tether Strap Rear Lower Storage Bins 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78 WARNING!

WARNING!

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE:

The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo. To cover the cargo area:

1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the cargo area. 2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover. 3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place. In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle. Rear Cargo Tie-Downs The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor, should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving. To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers. The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:

Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar.

(Continued) Rear Cargo Cover Rear Cargo Tie-Downs 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79 WARNING! (Continued) Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-

erly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visi-

bility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident. The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button. HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. NOTE:

HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-

rity Alarm is active. Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79 For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system. To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes. 2 NOTE:

Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. If you have any problems, or require assis-

tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-

mation or assistance. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80 80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. NOTE:

It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed. 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice

(holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete. NOTE:

If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remain-

ing button. DO NOT erase the channels. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. 5. On the garage door opener (in the garage), locate the LEARN or TRAINING button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAINING button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Rolling Code) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with Programming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps."

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming garage door openers manufactured before 1995. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Non-Rolling Code) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming A Non-Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Canadian/Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada/

United States that require the transmitter signals to time-out after several seconds of transmission. Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some US gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82 82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor. NOTE:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while you press and release

(cycle) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained. 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. If you unplugged the garage door opener/

device for programming, plug it back in at this time. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Canadian/Gate Operator) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Canadian/Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Using HomeLink To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:

Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-held transmitter. Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a rolling code. Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the trans-

ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84 84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Storage Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in the open position. Driving with the glove compartment open may result in injury in a collision. Door Storage Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy access. Glove Compartment To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle. Opened Glove Compartment Door Panel Storage 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85 Console Features The center console contains both an upper and a lower storage area. Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower storage compartment. WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85 Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision. 2 Overhead Console The overhead console contains courtesy/

reading lights and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also be included, if equipped. Storage Compartment To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on the small latch located on the lid. Lower Storage Compartment Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player located in the center console. Storage Compartment Latches Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player If Equipped Overhead Console 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86 86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Cupholders There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console. Front Cupholders There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers located in the fold-down center armrest. NOTE:

All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge. CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rear Cupholders Electrical Power Outlets Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87 The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87 NOTE:

The rear power outlet can be switched from ignition only to constant battery powered all the time. See your local authorized dealer for details. 2 Front Power Outlet In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console. Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse Center Console Outlet The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area. Rear Cargo Power Outlet 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88 88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Con-

sole Bin 2 F90F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel 3 F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instru-

ment Panel WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. CAUTION!

Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. After the use of high power draw accesso-

ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery. Power Inverter If Equipped There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. NOTE:

Certain high-end video game consoles, new computers and power tools will exceed this power limit. Power Inverter 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89 The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter. Sunglasses Bin Door At the front of the console, a compartment is provided for storing a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a push/push design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to close. WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Sunglasses Bin Door ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE:

If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position, retighten with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90 CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. The use of Sport Mode is not recommended when using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load. 90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:

To help control wind noise when the cross-

bars are not in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 inch

(2.5 cm). If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna. WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed. The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface. To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately. Long loads which extend over the wind-

shield, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle. Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 91 3 Instrument Cluster 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92 92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument Cluster Descriptions 1. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). 2. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. 3. Temperature Gauge WARNING!

4. Fuel Gauge A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/

RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located. CAUTION!

5. Instrument Cluster Display The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in this chapter for further information. NOTE:

The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93 SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93 3 SRT Instrument Cluster 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94 94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SRT Instrument Cluster Descriptions 1. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. 2. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). 3. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. After an engine warm up, any reading within 203F - 230F (95C - 110C) indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. WARNING!

4. Fuel Gauge A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located. CAUTION!

5. Instrument Cluster Display Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads greater than 230F

(110C) pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains above 230F

(110C), turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in this chapter for further information. NOTE:

The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicles systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. 3 SRT Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls 1 Instrument Cluster Display Controls 2 Instrument Cluster Display Screen Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls 1 Instrument Cluster Display Controls 2 Instrument Cluster Display Screen 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96 96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip Up Arrow Button Stop/Start If Equipped Audio Messages Screen Setup Diagnostic SRT Down Arrow Button Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the Main Menu items. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the Main Menu items. Left Arrow Button Push and release the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and release the left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Instrument Cluster Display Speed Warning SRT Right Arrow Button 1 Driver Interactive Display 2 Speedometer Display 3 Main Display 4 Menu Name And Menu Page The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

The Main Menu items selectable in the driver interactive display consist of the following:

Speedometer Vehicle Info Terrain If Equipped SRT Performance If Equipped Driver Assist If Equipped Fuel Economy Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97 OK Button Oil Life Reset Display Menu Items Push the OK button to access/

select the information screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed/

selected features that can be reset. Oil Change Reset If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure. 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine). 2. Navigate to Oil Life submenu in Vehicle Info in the instrument cluster display. 3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to 100%. Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within ten seconds. 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97 SRT Instrument Cluster Display Performance Features The instrument cluster display can be used to program the following Performance Features. 3 SRT Performance Features Controls To access, press and release either the up or down arrow button until SRT appears in the instrument cluster display, then press and release the right arrow button to cycle through the features. Press the OK button to select a feature. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98 98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect SRT Performance Features Instrument Cluster Display Messages Service Tire Pressure System WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or track use only and should not be done on any public roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. Includes the following, but not limited to:

Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control To access the SRT Performance Features, press the Apps button on the touchscreen then press the Performance Pages button on the touchscreen. The Performance Page includes the following Service Power Steering Cruise Control Off Cruise Control Ready ACC Driver Override Speed Warning Set To XXX MPH Speed Warning Exceeded Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Ignition Or Accessory On Vehicle Not In Park menus:

Home Timers Gauges 1 Gauges 2 G Force Engine Cruise Control Set To XXX MPH Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low If Remote Start Active Push Start Button If Equipped Equipped Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) Inflate Tire to XX 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99 Remote Start Canceled Door Open If Service Transmission Remote Start Canceled Hood Open If Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open If Service Shifter Service Air Suspension System Normal Ride Height Achieved Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved Remote Start Canceled Time Expired If Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Door Open Doors Open Liftgate Open Hood Open Shift Not Allowed Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset If Service Air Bag System Service Air Bag Warning Light Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Service Air Suspension System Immediately Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled Height Wait Height Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To D Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To R Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99 For further information on the color warning and indicator lights in the instrument cluster, refer to Warning Lights And Messages in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items The instrument cluster display can be used to view the main menu items for several features. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive display menu options until the desired menu is reached. 3 NOTE:

Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. Tachometer With Digital Speedometer Supplemental Gauge Speedometer Non - SRT Push and release the up or down arrow button until the main gauge menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to select the analog or digital type speedometer display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units

(mph or km/h If Equipped) of the speedometer. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100 100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SRT Push and release the up or down arrow button until the main gauge menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow buttons to change between large and small speedometer display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units

(mph or km/h If Equipped) of the speedometer. Vehicle Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus and push and release the OK button to select or reset the resettable submenus. NON SRT Tire Pressure Oil Pressure Transmission Temperature Oil Life Oil Temperature Battery Voltage SRT Tire Pressure Oil Life Coolant Temperature Battery Voltage Storage Mode If Equipped Transmission Temperature Intake Air Tempera-

ture Oil Temperature Engine Torque Oil Pressure Engine Power Air/Fuel Ratio If Boost Pressure If Equipped Equipped I/C Coolant Temperature If Equipped Terrain If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to display the Selec-Track or Drivetrain. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to display the Selec-Terrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain, and Wheel Articulation. SRT Selec-Track If Equipped Drivetrain: Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, Axle Lock Non SRT Selec-Terrain: Displays messages concerning Selec-Terrain status. Air Suspension If Equipped: Displays messages concerning Air Suspension status. Drivetrain: Displays information on drivetrain status of Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, and Axle Lock. Wheel Articulation: Displays current wheel articulation. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101 Performance Features If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until the SRT icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to scroll through the performance feature submenus. WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or track use only and should not be done on any public roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The Performance Features include the following:

0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101 Reaction Time If Selected 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer Recent Best Last Recent 3 Reaction Time If Selected 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Timer Reaction Time If Selected Reaction Time If Selected 0-60 feet (0-18 meters) Timer Braking Distance Distance From Speed Current G-Forces Peak G-Forces Lap Timer Lap History Reaction Time If Selected 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer Top Speed Will list the last four laps with the best lap highlighted in green. Best Last Recent Best Last Recent Best Last Recent Best Last 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102 102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Driver Assist Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu If Equipped The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC and LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on the status of ACC and LaneSense. Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated, the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off. Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready. Push and release the SET + or the SET- button

(located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the instrument cluster display:

ACC SET When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

System Cancel Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning NOTE:

The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. LaneSense If Equipped The instrument cluster display displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Fuel Economy Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy feature. Toggle left or right to select a display with or without Current Fuel Economy Information. Range The display shows the estimated distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display will change to a RANGE LOW message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the RANGE LOW message and a new Range value will display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103 NOTE:

Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value. Average The display shows the average fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset. Current This display shows the current fuel economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving. Trip Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following:

Distance Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103 Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. Hold the OK button to reset feature information. Stored Messages Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow you to scroll through the stored messages. Stop / Start If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button on the steering wheel to scroll to the Stop/Start menu in the driver interactive display. For further information on the use and different modes of the Stop/Start System, refer to Stop / Start System If Equipped in Starting And Operating. Audio Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. 3 Screen Setup Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104 104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Gear Display Full (default setting) Compass (default setting) Single Upper Left None Outside Temp Time Range Average MPG Current MPG Trip A Trip B Outside Temp (default setting) Terrain (show/hide) SRT Performance Pages (show/hide) Upper Right None Compass Time Range Average MPG Current MPG Trip A Trip B Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings) Cancel Restore Current Gear On Off (default setting) Favorite Menus Speedometer Vehicle Info Driver Assist (show/hide) Fuel Economy (show/hide) Trip Info (show/hide) Stop/Start Audio (show/hide) Messages Screen Setup Diagnostic Codes SRT Speed Warning SRT The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument cluster display. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105 Diagnostics SRT Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Diagnostics icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to display the diagnostic trouble codes and descriptions. When the end of the list is reached, No or End of Diagnostic Code will appear in the instrument cluster display. Speed Warning SRT Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release OK to enter speed warning. Use the up or down arrow button to select a desired speed, then push and release OK to set the speed. The white passive speed limiter telltale will light up with a notification text message (Speed Warning Set to XX, followed by the selected unit). When the set speed is exceeded, an audible chime will sound until the speed is no longer exceeded. The white passive speed limiter telltale will turn yellow and will flash, and a pop up message of Speed Warning Exceeded will display. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105 NOTE:

You can turn the Speed Warning off by using the up/down arrows to scroll through speed list and select OFF at the bottom of the list. These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped) NOTE:

This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery. In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle. When load reduction is activated, the message Battery Saver On or Battery Saver Mode will appear in the instrument cluster display. The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously. 3 If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to Battery Charge Warning Light in Warning Lights And Messages located in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. The electrical loads that may be switched off

(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction:

Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors HVAC System 150W Power Inverter System Audio and Telematics System 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106 106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:

The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly. Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets

+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping). Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices. Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods). The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months). The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely. The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked. The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-

ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices. What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present (Battery Saver On or Battery Saver Mode) During a trip:

Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:

exterior) Turn off redundant lights (interior or Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) Check the audio settings (volume) After a trip:

Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents). Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time). The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecu-

tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. TRIP COMPUTER Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset. Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last reset. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. To Reset Trip A/B Function Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to clear the resettable function being displayed. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Red Warning Lights Air Bag Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Brake Warning Light This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107 3 If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108 108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Battery Charge Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component. Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. Refer to Power Steering in Starting And Operating for further information. WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109 Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;

however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109 a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Hood Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed. This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. 3 Liftgate Open Warning Light a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool; whichever comes first. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning

(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in In Case Of Emergency for further information. This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open. NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Oil Pressure Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110 110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Oil Temperature Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels. Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position and if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information. Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally. WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. Yellow Warning Lights Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light This light will turn on when the ACC system is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) in Starting And Operating. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light If Equipped This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111 The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added. A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning. 3 This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event. Low Washer Fluid Warning Light If Equipped Service LaneSense Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer. LaneSense Warning Light If Equipped The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low. Refer to Adding Washer Fluid in Servicing And Maintenance for further information. Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112 CAUTION!

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light If Equipped 112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs. WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Service 4WD Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service. Refer to Forward Collision Warning (FCW) in Safety for further information. Service Stop/Start System Warning Light If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113 Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire. CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113 installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 3 CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114 114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Yellow Indicator Lights Air Suspension Active Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is actively adjusting the ride height. Refer to Quadra-Lift If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the vehicle is automatically lowered from ride height position downward for easy entry and exit of the vehicle. Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Aerodynamic setting. Refer to Quadra-Lift If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting. Refer to Quadra-Lift If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting. Refer to Quadra-Lift If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. 4WD Low Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels. Refer to Four-Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use. NEUTRAL Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear driveshafts are disengaged from the Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light If Equipped powertrain. This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward Collision Warning is off. Refer to Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation in Safety for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115 Green Indicator Lights Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light If Equipped This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is set and there is no target vehicle detected. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light If Equipped This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If Equipped in Starting And Operating Cruise Control Set Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set to the desired speed. Refer to Speed Control in Starting And Operating for further information. This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. Refer to Exterior Lights in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further This light will turn on when Snow Mode is active. Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. information. LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is armed and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Refer to Exterior Lights in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. Sport Mode Indicator Light This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active. Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. 3 Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active. Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. Stop/Start Active Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in Autostop mode. for further information. Park/Headlight On Indicator Light 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116 116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light White Indicator Lights LaneSense Indicator Light If Equipped This light will turn on when Tow Mode is active. Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. Track Mode SRT Indicator Light This light will turn on when Track Mode is active. Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light If Equipped This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on, but not set. Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Turn Signal Indicator Lights Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down

(left) or up (right). NOTE:

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. This light will turn on when Custom Mode SRT is active. Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off. When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected lane line. Refer to LaneSense If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. SRT Speed Warning Indicator Light If Equipped When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, the indication will light up yellow and flash along with a continuous chime. Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display. For further information refer to Instrument Cluster Display in this chapter. The number 55 is only an example of a speed that can be set. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117 Speed Warning Indicator Light If Equipped Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light Valet Mode SRT Indicator Light GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117 When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop up message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is exceeded by 1.9mph

(3km/h) or more, the indication will light up yellow and flash along with a continuous chime

(up to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display. For further information, refer to Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. NOTE:

The number 55 is only an example of a speed that can be set. This light will turn on when the speed control has been turned on, but not set. Refer to Speed Control If Equipped in Starting And Operating This light will turn on when Valet Mode is active. Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement for further information. for further information. Selec Speed Control Indicator Light If Equipped Blue Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light 3 This light will turn on when Selec Speed Control is activated. To activate Selec Speed Control, assure the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive

(4WD) Low and push the button on the Instrument Panel. NOTE:

If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, To Enter Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low will appear in the instrument cluster display. This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, flash to pass scenario. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118 118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be driveable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION!

WARNING!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could ONLY an authorized service technician cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system. should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle. If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an acci-

dent involving serious injury or death. Access, or allow others to access, infor-

mation stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. For further information, refer to Cybersecurity in Multimedia in your Owners Manual. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119 If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. 3 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120 120 SAFETY FEATURES Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound, as well as some related motor noises. ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). SAFETY You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop) The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop NOTE:

These are all normal characteristics of ABS. WARNING!

The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to inter-

ference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121 ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The yellow Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light is on. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC). Brake System Warning Light The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. SAFETY 121 If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. Brake Assist System (BAS) The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the vehicles braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not pump the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. 4 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122 122 SAFETY WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that the feature is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel. NOTE:

The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the drivers steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles. NOTE:

ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in Full Off mode (if equipped). Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes. WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-

tion. Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-

tion. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. WARNING!

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-

tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-

tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-

dize the users safety or the safety of others.

(Continued) SAFETY 123 WARNING! (Continued) Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. 4 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124 124 SAFETY ESC Operating Modes NOTE:

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes. ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. To enter the Partial Off mode, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off. NOTE:

For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushes may be required to return to ESC On. will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the ESC OFF message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON/RUN again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch. WARNING!

When in Partial Off mode, the TCS func-

tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in Partial Off mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode. Full Off If Equipped This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the Full Off mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime NOTE:

System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial Off mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed, the system will return to ESC Full Off. Full Off can only be achieved in Track Mode (if equipped). ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if equipped). WARNING!

In the ESC Full Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC Full Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125 WARNING! (Continued) The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions. ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. NOTE:

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON/RUN. Each time the ignition is turned ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. SAFETY 125 The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) in a reduced mode. Hill Descent Control (HDC) If Equipped Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4L Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during 4 various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. HDC Has Three States:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate) 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application) 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126 126 SAFETY Enabling HDC HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

Driveline is in 4L Range Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h) Park brake is released Driver door is closed Activating HDC Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:

HDC Target Set Speeds P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate. R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h) 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) if equipped NOTE:

During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions. Driver Override The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at anytime. Deactivating HDC HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h) Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade Vehicle is shifted to PARK Disabling HDC HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur:

The driver pushes the HDC switch The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range The park brake is applied Driver door opens 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph

(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph

(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately) HDC detects excessive brake temperature Feedback To The Driver The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in. The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-

nate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-

ating condition for HDC. The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds, then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met. The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds, then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess speed. The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:

The feature must be enabled. The vehicle must be stopped. The park brake must be off. The driver door must be closed. The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. SAFETY 127 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear). HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL

(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active. 4 WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the drivers responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128 128 SAFETY Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display, refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster display, perform the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward) 2. Shift the transmission into PARK 3. Apply the park brake 4. Start the engine 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half turn to the left 6. Push the ESC OFF button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within 20 seconds. The ESC OFF Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right 8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON/RUN. If the sequence was completed properly, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting Towing With HSA HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer. WARNING!

If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pres-

sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually acti-

vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-

mission in PARK. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129 Rain Brake Support (RBS) Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required. Ready Alert Braking (RAB) Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system for a panic stop. Traction Control System (TCS) The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in a reduced mode. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. NOTE:

TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-

tions. Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting And Operating for further information. When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to 4 SAFETY 129 attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes. WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. Selec Speed Control (SSC) If Equipped Selec Speed Control (SSC) is intended for off road driving in 4L Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes. SSC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate) 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application) 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130 130 SAFETY Enabling SSC SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:

Driveline is in 4L Range Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h) Park brake is released Driver door is closed Driver is not applying throttle Activating SSC Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met:

Driver releases throttle Driver releases brake Transmission is in any selection other than PARK (P) The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:

SSC Target Set Speeds 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h) 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h) Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h) REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h) 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) if equipped NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active NOTE:

During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions. SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness. Driver Override:

The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time. Deactivating SSC SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake application Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h) Vehicle is shifted to PARK 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131 Disabling SSC SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur:

The driver pushes the SSC switch The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to excess speed. The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The park brake is applied Driver door opens The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph

(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph

(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately) Feedback To The Driver:

The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state SSC is in. The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-

nate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-

ating condition for SSC. The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC switch but enable conditions are not met. WARNING!

SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) If Equipped The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. SAFETY 131 Rear Detection Zones 4 When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE (R). The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft

(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the B-Pillar, and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132 132 SAFETY NOTE:

The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in random false detections on the trailer, and false chimes when the turn signal is used. The BSM system may experience drop outs

(blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds). The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects

(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the turn signal is activated during the alert on the side of the vehicle corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime) alert can be heard. During this audible (chime) alert, the radio volume will be reduced. Refer to Modes Of Operation in this section for further information. Sensor Location Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133 Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle. SAFETY 133 Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching 4 Side Monitoring Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph

(48 km/h). Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Overtaking/Passing 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134 134 SAFETY The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. Opposing Traffic WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicles mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Cross Path (RCP) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. NOTE:

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135 When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE

(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/

Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. SAFETY 135 NOTE:

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;

the RCP state always requests the chime. Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. NOTE:

The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. 4 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136 136 SAFETY General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with Mitigation system provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warn-

ings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-

ings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137 If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 26 mph

(42 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes. The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles, such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4L Range or ESC Full Off Mode is active, the FCW system will be auto-

matically deactivated. SAFETY 137 FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The default sensitivity of FCW is the Medium setting and the system status is Warning &

Braking. This allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking. Changing the FCW status to the Far setting allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the latter is at a farther distance than "Medium" setting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision. Changing the FCW status to the Near setting, allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the Far and Medium settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. 4 FCW Message WARNING!

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated. NOTE:

The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h). Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138 138 SAFETY NOTE:

Changing the FCW status to Only Warning prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings. Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down. FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens. FCW Limited Warning If the instrument cluster displays ACC/FCW Limited Functionality or ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. Service FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:

ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with run flat tires, when the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi

(96 kPa) or lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire at the first opportunity. At inflation pressure of or below 14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode of operation. In this condition, it is recommended a vehicle maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km). The manufacturer does not recommend using the run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (6.5C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139 Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for information on how to properly inflate the vehicles tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off. NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F (20C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicles recommended cold tire pressure value. SAFETY 139 CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-

inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been estab-

lished for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on after-

market wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature operation. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

(Continued) 4 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140 140 SAFETY CAUTION! (Continued) After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. NOTE:

The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-

sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-infla-

tion has not reached the level to trigger illu-

mination of the TPMS Warning Light. Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of the following components:

Receiver Module The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures TPMS Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an

"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) in a different color. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. Tire Pressure Monitoring Display NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141 NOTE:

Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, BAR, or kPa. Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic display to the vehicles recommended cold tire pressure displayed in the Inflate to XX message. NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. Service TPM System Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The instrument cluster display will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds. This message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"

message will not be present, and a pressure SAFETY 141 value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the following:

Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM 4 sensors NOTE:

There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain on, a chime will sound, and the instrument cluster display will still display a pressure value in the different color graphic display and an Inflate to XX message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142 142 SAFETY In addition, the instrument cluster display will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each subse-

quent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster display will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS Deactivation If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring

(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features Seat Belt Systems Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags Supplemental Active Head Restraints Child Restraints Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143 Important Safety Precautions 3. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to Child Restraints in this section for further information.) 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints in this section for further information) must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating position. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured. SAFETY 143 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the Customer Assistance section for customer service contact information. WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. 4 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144 144 SAFETY Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert) Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. Change of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145 NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. WARNING!

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.

(Continued) SAFETY 145 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-

rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Two people should never be belted into a 4 inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.

(Continued) single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/

shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. WARNING!

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces wont be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146 146 SAFETY WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) A twisted seat belt may not protect you A seat belt that is worn under your arm is properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you cant straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possi-

bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued) dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju-

ries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-

ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. SAFETY 147 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. 4 Adjustable Anchorage Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. Positioning The Lap Belt 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148 148 SAFETY As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. WARNING!

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

Position the shoulder belt across the ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-

cally required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupants body is LESS than 6 inches. Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-

mended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will with-

draw any slack in the shoulder belt. Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Always make all seat belt height adjust-

ments when the vehicle is stationary. Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage

(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. SAFETY 149 Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position. 4 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150 150 SAFETY If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in colli-

sions. Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151 How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints

(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed. When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. NOTE:

The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact. Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:

Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components 1 Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim) 2 Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover) 3 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 4 Seat Back WARNING!

All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.

(Continued) SAFETY 151 WARNING! (Continued) Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed. 4 NOTE:

For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to Head Restraints in Getting To Know Your Vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152 152 SAFETY Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR) Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a collision, the front half of the head restraint will be extended forward and separated from the rear half of the head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into the original position to best protect the occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the drivers and front passengers seat before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their function. WARNING!

Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an authorized dealer immediately. Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Seat Belt Buckle Switch Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Air Bag Warning Light The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on Redundant Air Bag Warning Light SAFETY 153 If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel section of this manual. 4 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-

tently or remains on while driving. NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you wont have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154 154 SAFETY Front Air Bags This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag WARNING!

Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. WARNING!

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-

sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155 WARNING! (Continued) Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manu-

ally. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Front Air Bag Operation Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. SAFETY 155 Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. WARNING!

Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. 4 Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156 156 SAFETY Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatbacks trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags;

the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157 The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events. WARNING!

Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-

nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. Side Impacts The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. SAFETY 157 WARNING!

Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Seat belts (and child restraints where 4 appropriate) are necessary for your protec-

tion in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158 158 SAFETY WARNING!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Rollover Events Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed. The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. Air Bag System Components NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-

tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Seat Belt Buckle Switch Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159 If A Deployment Occurs The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-

pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not perma-

nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you havent healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. As the air bags deflate, you may see some NOTE:

smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that gener-

ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-

tion. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. SAFETY 159 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-

rior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped) 4 Cut off battery power to the electric motor

(if equipped) power Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System Unlock the power door locks 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160 160 SAFETY Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:

Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-

tion Door Cut off battery power to the:

Engine Electric Motor (if equipped) Electric power steering Brake booster Electric park brake Horn Front wiper Headlamp washer pump Automatic transmission gear selector NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-

tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer. Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING!

Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161 WARNING! (Continued) Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-

dentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. SAFETY 161 The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. 4 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162 162 SAFETY Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs size. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owners Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owners Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE:

For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-

givers or call: 18883274236 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canadas website for additional information:

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-

safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163 SAFETY 163 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicles seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle 4 Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164 164 SAFETY Infant And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicles seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the childs back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING!

Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165 WARNING! (Continued) After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicles seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the childs shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

SAFETY 165 If the answer to any of these questions was no, then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/

shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A childs squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 4 WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166 166 SAFETY Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type the Child + Child Combined Weight of Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Restraint Restraint Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

(29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs Restraint

(29.5 kg) Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An X Below Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Tether LATCH Lower Anchor Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor LATCH Lower Anchors Only X X X X X X 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167 Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System SAFETY 167 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicles seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. LATCH Label 4 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Lower Anchorage Symbol

(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168 168 SAFETY Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH What is the weight limit (childs weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?

No No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owners manual for more information. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

No Yes Yes SAFETY 169 Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owners manual for more information. The head restraint may be removed in only the center seating position if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint. Refer to Head Restraints in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. 4 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170 170 SAFETY Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages. Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage Center Seat LATCH WARNING!

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This posi-

tion is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to To Install A LATCH-Compat-

ible Child Restraint for typical installation instructions. LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171 Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position. 1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing. Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing. 3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm rest. Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. SAFETY 171 To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 4 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172 172 SAFETY 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

(ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the childs reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!

Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description in Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) under Occupant Restraint Systems for additional information on ALR. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. SAFETY 173 Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 4 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174 174 SAFETY What is the weight limit (childs weight +

weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. The head restraint may be removed in only the center seating position if it interferes with the installation of the child restraint. Refer to Head Restraints in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further information. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. Yes Yes No

 

 

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175 Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!

Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. SAFETY 175 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor. 4 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176 176 SAFETY Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. 2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages. Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback) 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat. Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177 5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. WARNING! (Continued) SAFETY TIPS An incorrectly anchored tether strap could Transporting Passengers SAFETY 177 lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat-

backs as you remove slack in the strap. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING!

Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. 4 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Top Tether Strap Mounting Transporting Pets 6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions. WARNING!

The top tether anchorages are not visible until the gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178 178 SAFETY Exhaust Gas WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. If you are required to drive with the trunk/

liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four The Air Bag warning light to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information. Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. before ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle. ONLY use the drivers side floor mat on the drivers side floor area. To check for inter-

ference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accel-

erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.

(Continued) ONLY use the passengers side floor mat on the passengers side floor area.

(Continued) SAFETY 179 ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the drivers side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control. NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accel-

erator, brake, or clutch pedals. 4 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-

ference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180 180 SAFETY Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. WARNING!

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

ALWAYS remove any Track-Use equip-

ment before driving on public roads. ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts when driving on public roads. In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-

rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Fluid Leaks Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. WARNING!

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using Track-Use parts and equipment:

NEVER use any Track-Use equipment on public roads. FCA US LLC does not autho-

rize the use of Track-Use equipment on public roads. The intended use of Track-Use parts is for race vehicles on race tracks. To help ensure the safety of the race driver, engi-

neers should supervise the installation of Track-Use parts. FCA US LLC does not authorize the installa-

tion or use of any part noted as Track-Use on any new vehicle prior to its first retail sale. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

181 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Automatic Transmission The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 5 STARTING THE ENGINE Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING!

Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then shift the automatic transmission into PARK and apply the parking brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from the vehicle and vehicle is locked. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182 182 STARTING AND OPERATING Normal Starting To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP button again. 4. NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button 5. 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph

(8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode

(NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when the transmission is not in PARK. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the transmission will automatically select PARK and the engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode. NOTE:

The system will automatically time out and the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK. ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions With Drivers Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:

OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode, 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC mode

(instrument cluster will display ACC), 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument cluster will display ON/RUN), 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster will display OFF). NOTE:

Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning message will display in the instrument cluster. For further information, refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. AutoPark AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following pages occur. It is a backup system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages. WARNING!

Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) P is indicated in the instrument cluster display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a backup system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. STARTING AND OPERATING 183 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less Ignition switched from RUN to ACC NOTE:

For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, The engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-

tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF. If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark. AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-

5 mission Vehicle is not in PARK Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-

Drivers seat belt is unbuckled Drivers door is ajar Brake pedal is not depressed mission Vehicle is not in PARK 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184 184 STARTING AND OPERATING The MESSAGE AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear will display in the instrument cluster. NOTE:

In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to P to select desired gear. If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may AutoPark. AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less. The MESSAGE Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph

(1.9 km/h). WARNING!

If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph

(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. 4WD LOW If Equipped AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW. The MESSAGE AutoPark Disabled will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Additional customer warnings will be given when both of these conditions are met:

Vehicle is not in PARK Drivers door is ajar The MESSAGE AutoPark Not Engaged will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the drivers door is closed. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedure it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure. WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Jump Starting Procedure in In Case Of Emergency for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185 CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again. Cold Weather Operation (Below 22F Or 30C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended. After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. The engine block heater cord is located:

3.6L Engine Coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube. 5.7L Engine Bundled and fastened to the injector harness. WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS NON-SRT A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles

(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. STARTING AND OPERATING 185 While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory are high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications. 5 CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-

tion. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indica-

tion of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add oil as required. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186 186 STARTING AND OPERATING ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SRT The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle. Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval. It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in period:

0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):

Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time. more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration. Avoid aggressive braking. Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM. Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph

(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits. 100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):

Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-

tion in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears). Avoid aggressive braking. Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM. Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph

(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits. 300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):

Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher RPMs when possible. Do not perform sustained operation with the Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph

(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits. For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):

Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi (2414 km). NOTE:

Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher through the first oil change interval. Running the engine with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe engine damage. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the PARK (P) position. The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not accelerator pedal at wide open throttle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187 STARTING AND OPERATING 187 WARNING! (Continued) When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-

dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-

gaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. 5 When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued) Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON mode, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. NOTE:

When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188 188 STARTING AND OPERATING If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued) CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-

erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued) Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-

tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189 Ignition Park Interlock Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode WARNING! (Continued) Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-

dren), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode. NOTE:

The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. STARTING AND OPERATING 189 The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Push the ECO switch in the center stack of the instrument panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A light on the switch indicates when ECO mode is disabled (for non-SRT models) or enabled (for SRT models). 5 Fuel Economy Mode Switch (Non-SRT Model) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190 190 STARTING AND OPERATING Some ECO mode functions may be tempo-

rarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors. Active Noise Cancellation If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation System. This system uses four microphones embedded in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise, which sometimes occurs when operating in specific driving conditions such as ECO and Tow mode. An onboard frequency generator creates counteracting sound waves through the audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet. EightSpeed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear range is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continu-

ously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed. The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles

(kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. Fuel Economy Mode Switch (SRT Model) When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the vehicle control systems will change the following:

The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later. conservative. The overall driving performance will be more Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will operate in "Aero" mode over a broader speed range. Refer to the section on Quadra-Lift for further information. In SRT models, the transmission will launch

(from a stop) in second gear, and the torque converter clutch may engage at lower engine speeds and remain on longer. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191 The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and MANUAL (M) or SPORT

(S) (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL or SPORT

(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), if equipped, will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information. Gear Selector NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick

(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. Gear Ranges Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. STARTING AND OPERATING 191 When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. When exiting the vehicle, always:

Apply the parking brake, Shift the transmission into PARK, Turn the ignition OFF and, 5 Remove the key fob from the vehicle. NOTE:

On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position. WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substi-

tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192 192 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle. The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-

tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-

erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-

tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-

dren), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION!

Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193 The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated. Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking. With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK. NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK position (when pushed forward), it is prob-

ably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the trans-

mission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle. WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in In Case Of Emergency for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 193 DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs

(such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control refer to "AutoStick" in this chapter for further information to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. During extremely cold temperatures

(-22F [-30C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194 194 STARTING AND OPERATING MANUAL (M) OR SPORT (S) IF EQUIPPED The MANUAL (M, +/-) or SPORT (S, +/-) position

(beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to AutoStick in this chapter for further information. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL or SPORT (AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster. Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

NOTE:

In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer). 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N). 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF. 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-

rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. When To Use TOW Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, select TOW mode, using the rotary switch on the center console. Selecting TOW mode will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. Refer to Selec-Track in this chapter for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195 AutoStick AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations. Operation To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel (if equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL or SPORT position), or the shift paddles (if equipped), to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in the MANUAL or SPORT position, or tapping the (-) shift paddle

(if equipped), will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift paddle, if equipped) will command an upshift. NOTE:

The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled

(or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect Programmable Settings or, in SRT models, using Drive Modes. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the gear selector, or the shift paddles, if equipped), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below. The transmission will automatically down-

shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. The transmission will automatically down-

shift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. STARTING AND OPERATING 195 You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or third gear, in 4L range, Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions. If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if 5 equipped), or holding the gear selector in the

(-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed. Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled. The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected. NOTE:

When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196 196 STARTING AND OPERATING To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until "D" is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. SPORT MODE IF EQUIPPED SPORT Mode Button Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode feature. This mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all set to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide improved throttle response and modified transmission shift points for an enhanced driving experience, as well as a greater amount of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the SPORT button on the instrument panel switch bank. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/

Precautions If Equipped The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four-wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction. NOTE:

The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom-

mended. Refer to Off-Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information. Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/

Precautions If Equipped The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case provides three mode positions:

4WD HI NEUTRAL 4WD LOW This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197 When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components. When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD system mode position, see the information below:

4WD AUTO This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement. STARTING AND OPERATING 197 NOTE:

Refer to Selec-Terrain If Equipped in this chapter for further information on the various positions and their intended usages. NEUTRAL This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It is to be used for towing your vehicle behind another vehicle. Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for further information. WARNING!

5 You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198 198 STARTING AND OPERATING 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h). NOTE:

Refer to Selec-Terrain If Equipped for further information on the various positions and their intended usages. Shifting Procedures 4WD HI To 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into N, and push the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer case switch. The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete. The 4WD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete. NOTE:

If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in NEUTRAL push 4 Low message will flash from the instru-

ment cluster display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped;

however, difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift comple-

tion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph

(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the shift. Transfer Case Switch NOTE:

If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the instrument cluster display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. 4WD LOW To 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph

(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the 4WD LOW button once on the transfer case switch. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199 Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine running. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. 5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A NEUTRAL message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. NEUTRAL (N) Switch 6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. 8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement. STARTING AND OPERATING 199 9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL. 10. Firmly apply the parking brake. 11. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine turns off. 12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. Release the brake pedal. 13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice

(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition to the OFF mode. 5 14. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely attached to a tow vehicle. NOTE:

If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Proce-

dure in Owners Manual message will flash from the instrument cluster display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further infor-

mation. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200 200 STARTING AND OPERATING Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Start the engine. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second. NEUTRAL (N) Switch 8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch. Quadra-Drive II System If Equipped The optional Quadra-Drive II System features two torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differential

(ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate. Under normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels. With a traction difference between left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design, their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shifting information, preceding this section, for shifting this system. 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. QUADRA-LIFT IF EQUIPPED Description The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button. The vehicle will automatically raise and lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will raise the ride height accordingly. The buttons near the terrain switch in the center console area can be used to set preferred ride height to match the appropriate conditions. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201 Normal Ride Height (NRH) This is the stan-

dard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approx-

imately 1.1 inches (28 mm)) This is the primary position for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Push the UP button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be auto-

matically lowered to NRH. Refer to Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information. Selec-Terrain Switch 1 UP Button 2 Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Select-

able) 3 Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Select-

able) 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Custom-

er Selectable) 5 Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable) 6 DOWN Button STARTING AND OPERATING 201 Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approx-

imately 2.2 inches (55 mm)) This position is intended for off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the UP button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1 posi-

tion while vehicle speed is below 20 mph

(32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1. Refer to Driving Tips in Starting And Oper-

ating for further information. Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.6 inches (15 mm)) This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph

(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph

(90 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph

(40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph

(32 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in SPORT mode. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202 202 STARTING AND OPERATING Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-

mately 1.6 inches (40 mm) This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the DOWN button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph

(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled. To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the Up button once while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). NOTE:

Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch-Screen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the gear selector is in "PARK", the terrain switch is in "AUTO", the transfer-case is in "AUTO and the vehicle level should be either in Normal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the air suspension level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is switched OFF and the door is open to prevent setting the alarm off. The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed from the default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons. Refer to Selec-Terrain in Starting And Operating for further information. The system requires that the engine be running for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door(s) is/are closed. The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear. After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance. To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. For further information refer to Driving Tips in Starting And Operating section. NOTE:

If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your authorized dealer for service. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203 Air Suspension Modes The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Auto Entry/Exit Mode To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air suspension system has a feature which automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit ride height. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Transport Mode To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Suspension Display Messages Mode The Suspension Display Messages setting allows you to only display suspension warnings. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 203 NOTE:

This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Instrument Cluster Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. 5 Operation The indicator lamps 2 through 5 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the UP button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the "DOWN" button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204 204 STARTING AND OPERATING Pushing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The UP button can be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions

(i.e. vehicle speed, etc). Pushing the DOWN button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times. Each push will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions

(i.e. vehicle speed, etc.) Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps and instrument cluster display messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes. Off-Road 2 (OR2) Indicator lamps 2, 3, and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2. Off-Road 1 (OR1) Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1. Normal Ride Height (NRH) Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position. Entry/Exit Mode Indicator lamp 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 5 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 5 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 5 will go solid. If during the height change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph

(24 km/h), the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height change continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed. Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode. Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 2 and 5 will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack Mode. Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel Alignment Mode. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205 SELEC-TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED Selec-Terrain Mode Selection Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains. Selec-Terrain Switch Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:

SNOW Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain oper-

ating conditions), the transmission may use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height

(NRH). AUTO Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and accelera-

tion over two-wheel drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to Normal Ride Height (NRH). SAND Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for Sand is Normal Ride Height (NRH). MUD Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. STARTING AND OPERATING 205 If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to Off Road 1. ROCK Off road calibration is only available in 4WD LOW range. The vehicle is raised

(if equipped with Air Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction based tuning with improved steerability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from 4WD LOW to 4WD HIGH, the Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO. NOTE:

Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control for steep downhill control. See Elec-

tronic Brake Control System in this section for further information. Instrument Cluster Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206 206 STARTING AND OPERATING SELEC-TRACK IF EQUIPPED (SRT) Description Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains. Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select the desired mode. Selec-Track Switch Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. Selec-Track consists of the following positions:

SPORT Dry weather, on-road calibration. Performance based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with improved handling and acceleration over a two-wheel drive vehicle. This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle. SNOW Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle. AUTO Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and accelera-

tion over two-wheel drive vehicles. TRACK Track road calibration for use on high traction surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle. TOW Use this mode for towing and hauling heavy loads. Vehicle suspension will go to SPORT mode. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is enabled in the ESC system. This feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle. Custom This mode allows the driver to create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for quick selection of favorite settings. The system will return to AUTO mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. While in CUSTOM Mode the Stability, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, all-wheel drive set up, and Paddle shifter settings may be configured through the custom mode set-up. NOTE:

Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207 Active Damping System Launch Control This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations including cornering, acceleration and braking. There are 3 modes:

Street Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO, SNOW and CUSTOM.) Used during highway speeds where a touring suspension feel is desired. Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO, SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) Provides a firm suspension for better handling. Track Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO, TRACK and CUSTOM.) Provides a full firm suspension for an aggressive track expe-

rience. Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a form of traction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch. Preconditions:

Launch Control should not be used on public roads. Always check track conditions and the surrounding area. Launch Control is not available within the first 500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in. Launch Control should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operating temperature. STARTING AND OPERATING 207 Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved road surfaces only. CAUTION!

Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended. Launch Control is only available when the following procedure is followed:

NOTE:

Pushing the SRT button on the Selec-Track switch or pressing the Apps button on the touchscreen are the two options to access launch control features. Please refer to the Drive Modes Supplement for further information. 1. Press the Race Options button on the touchscreen or push the LAUNCH button on the Selec-Track switch. 2. Press the Launch RPM Set-Up button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your launch RPM for optimum launch/traction. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208 208 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. Press the Activate Launch Control button on the touchscreen, follow instructions in the instrument cluster display. Make sure the vehicle is not moving Put vehicle in first gear Steering wheel must be pointing straight Vehicle must be on level ground Apply brake pressure While holding the brake, rapidly apply and hold the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the Launch RPM Set-up screen NOTE:

Messages will appear in the instrument cluster display to inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions have not been met. 4. When the above conditions have been met, the instrument cluster display will read Release Brake. 5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system will return to its current ESC mode. Launch control will abort before launch completion, display Launch Aborted in the cluster under any the following conditions:

The accelerator pedal is released during launch. The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line. The ESC OFF button is pressed to change the system to another mode. NOTE:

After launch control has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC mode. CAUTION!

Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the transmission may occur. FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ONLY IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. NOTE:

This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect. POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209 Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to Customer Programmable Features in Multimedia for further information. If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed and the SERVICE POWER STEERING or the POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF SERVICE SYSTEM message is displayed within the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to Warning Lights And Messages in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. NOTE:

Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers. If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for service. If the Steering icon is displayed and the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message is displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. STOP/START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the engine. This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional engine starts. Automatic Mode The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode. STARTING AND OPERATING 209 To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:

The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to Instrument Cluster in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. The vehicle must be completely stopped. The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed. 5 The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition. Refer to the Stop/Start System in the Starting And Operating in this chapter for further information. Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop temperature. Engine has not reached normal operating To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210 210 STARTING AND OPERATING Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/

Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not stop:

Drivers seat belt is not buckled. Drivers door is not closed. Battery temperature is too warm or cold. Battery charge is low. Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved. HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed. HVAC set to MAX A/C. The transmission is not in a forward gear. Hood is open. Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode. Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure. Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:

Accelerator pedal input. While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:

The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE. To maintain cabin temperature comfort. HVAC is set to full defrost mode. Engine temp too high. HVAC system temperature or fan speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from manually adjusted. Steering angle beyond threshold. Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake ACC is on and speed is set. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above. pedal applications). Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed. A Stop/Start system error occurs. 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode. The vehicle is on a steep grade. previous AUTOSTOP. Battery voltage drops too low. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System STARTING AND OPERATING 211 Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. If the SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h). The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. Speed Control Buttons 5 1 On/Off 2 SET (+)/Accel 3 RES/Resume 4 SET (-)/Decel 5 CANC/Cancel NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. Stop/Start OFF Switch 1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. 2. The Stop/Start OFF message will appear in instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to Instrument Cluster in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/Start system), the engine will not be stopped. 4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212 212 STARTING AND OPERATING If this occurs, the Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. To Activate Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use. WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET

(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH

(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster display. Refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213 To Decrease Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster display. Refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Using Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. NOTE:

The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control. STARTING AND OPERATING 213 WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). 5 To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214 214 STARTING AND OPERATING The following conditions will also deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory:

Vehicle parking brake is applied NOTE:

Stability event occurs Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE Engine overspeed occurs ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter. ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate

(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-

matically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-

taining an appropriate distance between vehicles. Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode in this section. NOTE:

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected. You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected. WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-

nience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the drivers responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-

tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215 STARTING AND OPERATING 215 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) The ACC system:

You should switch off the ACC system:

Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-

tion zones). Cannot take street, traffic, and weather When entering a turn lane or highway off conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will release the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manu-

ally. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released.

(Continued) ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operate the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system. Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off 2 SET (+)/Accel 3 RES/Resume 4 SET (-)/Decel 5 Distance Setting Increase 6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off 7 Distance Setting Decrease 8 CANC/Cancel 5 NOTE:

Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifica-

tions to the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system. Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) When the drivers seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds ESC Full Off mode is active To Activate/Deactivate Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays ACC Ready. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216 216 STARTING AND OPERATING You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h). When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the instrument cluster displays ACC Ready. When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off. NOTE:

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:

When in Four-Wheel Drive Low When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is applied When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range When the brakes are overheated When the drivers door is open at low speeds Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will display the set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217 STARTING AND OPERATING 217 If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle. NOTE:

ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:

The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the instrument cluster display. The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal. To Cancel To Turn Off The following conditions cancel the system:

The brake pedal is applied. The CANC button is pushed. An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. position. The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is pushed. The ignition is placed in the OFF position. You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low. The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates. To Resume 5 The vehicle parking brake is applied. Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds. Driver door is opened at low speeds. If there is a set speed in memory push the RES

(resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed. The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode. NOTE:

The braking temperature exceeds normal If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer range (overheated). A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs. than two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218 218 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. To Decrease Speed While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h):

If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219 NOTE:

When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. When you use the SET (-) button to decel-

erate, if the engines braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle. The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop. The ACC system maintains set speed when driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-

tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-

hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-

heated). Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars

(medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display. STARTING AND OPERATING 219 Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) 5 Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220 220 STARTING AND OPERATING The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed. The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. The distance setting is changed. The system disengages. (Refer to the infor-

mation on ACC Activation). The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;

however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. NOTE:

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes. A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. Brake Alert NOTE:

The BRAKE! Screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously. Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side. Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter). If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the Sensed Vehicle Indicator icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221 ACC Operation At Stop If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action. If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment. While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment. WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status. Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following appears in the instrument cluster display:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated, the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off. STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready. Adaptive Cruise Control Set When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read ACC SET. When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument cluster display. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

System Cancel 5 Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222 222 STARTING AND OPERATING Display Warnings And Maintenance Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor and the system will deactivate. The ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. NOTE:

If the ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode in this section. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:

Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens. Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment. If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see an autho-

rized dealer for service. Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it. NOTE:

If the ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message occurs frequently

(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer. Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223 Clean Front Windshield Warning The ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield and the system will have degraded performance. The ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality. NOTE:

If the ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message occurs frequently

(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer. Service ACC/FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required or Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. STARTING AND OPERATING 223 Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. Towing A Trailer Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC. Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. 5 Offset Driving Condition Example 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224 224 STARTING AND OPERATING Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. NOTE:

On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited. Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. ACC Hill Example Turn Or Bend Example Lane Changing Example 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Narrow Vehicle Example Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. STARTING AND OPERATING 225 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. 5 La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226 226 STARTING AND OPERATING Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph

(32 km/h). To change between the different control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode. WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected. To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off control. It turns green when the cruise control is set. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster display. Refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227 Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. To Decrease Speed When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster display. Refer to Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-

quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. To Cancel The following conditions will cancel the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:

The brake pedal is applied. The CANC button is pushed. The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates. STARTING AND OPERATING 227 The vehicle parking brake is applied. The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated). The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position. The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). 5 To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is pushed The ignition is placed in the OFF position Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228 228 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle. NOTE:

The driver can disable the automatic braking function by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-

ride automatic braking by changing the gear or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking event. Automatic brakes are not available if ESC is not available. Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in 4LO. Automatic brakes will not be available if there NOTE:

is a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking System Module. The automatic braking function may only be applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle. The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides. The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. ParkSense will retain its last known configu-

ration state for the automatic braking func-

tion through ignition cycles. The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle. The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver. The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements. Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations. ParkSense will retain the last system state

(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229 The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. ParkSense Display The ParkSense display is shown in the instrument cluster display as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the obstacles distance and location relative to the vehicle. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 5 Slow Tone Fast Tone Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230 230 STARTING AND OPERATING The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Fast Tone Greater than 79 inches

(200 cm) Continuous Tone WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance

(inches/cm) Audible Alert Chime Arcs-Left Arcs-Center Arcs-Right Radio Volume Reduced 79-59 inches

(200-150 cm) 59-47 inches

(150-120 cm) 47-39 inches

(120-100 cm) 39-25 inches

(100-65 cm) 25-12 inches

(65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches

(30 cm) None None None None No Single 1/2 Second Tone None 6th Solid None Yes Slow None None Yes 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Slow None None Yes Fast None None Yes Fast Continuous 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Yes Yes NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231 Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. The factory default volume setting is medium. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or

"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232 232 STARTING AND OPERATING If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer. If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer. Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE:

Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly. Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-

tions could affect the performance of ParkSense. When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition. When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working prop-

erly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-

Sense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display. ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-

gate is in the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) Before using ParkSense, it is strongly The vehicle must be driven slowly when recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indica-

tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. CAUTION!

ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.

(Continued) using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle. STARTING AND OPERATING 233 NOTE:

The driver can disable the automatic braking function by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-

ride automatic braking by changing the gear or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking event. Automatic brakes are not available if ESC is not available. Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in 4LO. 5 Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking System Module. The automatic braking function may only be applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle. The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234 234 STARTING AND OPERATING The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. ParkSense will retain its last known configu-

ration state for the automatic braking func-

tion through ignition cycles. The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. NOTE:

The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle. and not to substitute the driver. The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements. Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations. The system is provided to assist the driver ParkSense Sensors ParkSense will retain the last system state

(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph

(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph

(9 km/h). A display warning will appear in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds 7 mph

(11 km/h). The four ParkSense sensors (or six, if equipped with Active Park Assist), located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. ParkSense Display The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions based on the objects distance and location relative to the vehicle. If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235 STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone For Rear Only Fast Tone 5 Slow Tone Fast Tone For Rear Only Continuous Tone 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236 236 STARTING AND OPERATING The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance

(inches/cm) Audible Alert Chime Arcs-Left Arcs-Center Arcs-Right Radio Volume Reduced Greater than 79 inches

(200 cm) None None None None No Single 1/2 Second Tone None 6th Solid None Yes Slow None None Yes WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR 79-59 inches

(200-150 cm) 59-47 inches

(150-120 cm) 47-39 inches

(120-100 cm) 39-25 inches

(100-65 cm) 25-12 inches

(65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches

(30 cm) 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Fast None None Yes Fast Continuous 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Yes Yes Front Distance Greater than 47 inches

(inches/cm)

(120 cm) 47-39 inches

(120-100 cm) 39-25 inches

(100-65 cm) WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT Audible Alert Chime Arcs-Left Arcs-Center Arcs-Right Radio Volume Reduced None None None None No None None None No 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 25-12 inches

(65-30 cm) Fast 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing Less than 12 inches

(30 cm) Continuous 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Yes Yes Slow None None Yes None None None No 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237 NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System. Refer to

"Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. The factory default volume setting is medium. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. NOTE:

When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be displayed. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. Service The ParkSense Park Assist System During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the

"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238 238 STARTING AND OPERATING When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with

"UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the

"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer. If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument cluster display, see your authorized dealer. Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE:

Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly. Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-

tions could affect the performance of ParkSense. When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition. When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster will display PARK-

SENSE OFF for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working prop-

erly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/

bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-

Sense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/

bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster. ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-

gate is in the open position. An opened lift-

gate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

(Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 239 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) Before using ParkSense, it is strongly The vehicle must be driven slowly when recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indica-

tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. CAUTION!

ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.

(Continued) using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/

visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as semi-automatic since the driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side). 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240 240 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE:

The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as required. The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver. During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver. The system may not work in all conditions

(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-

rately. This is due to the systems dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-

mance of the feature. The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences such as over or under inflated tires and new tires. Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park Assist System The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on). To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off). The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off automatically for any of the following conditions:

The parking maneuver is completed Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph

(30 km/h) when searching for a parking space Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space Touching the steering wheel during active steering guidance into the parking space Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch Driver's door is opened Rear liftgate is opened Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System intervention. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:

Gear position is in DRIVE Ignition is in the ON/RUN position ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-

vated Driver's door is closed Rear liftgate is closed Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h) NOTE:

If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. NOTE:

The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction. When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present. Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled the Active ParkSense Searching -

Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular message will appear in the instrument cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting. STARTING AND OPERATING 241 When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated. The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions

(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.). 5 The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles). When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular

(depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242 242 STARTING AND OPERATING The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver). Active ParkSense Searching When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking sequence. Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. Space Found Keep Moving Forward Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicles movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel. Space Found Shift To Reverse Space Found Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243 When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. NOTE:

Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. Check Surroundings Move Backward It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-

matic parking maneuver. When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually. The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled. STARTING AND OPERATING 243 If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle. When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. 5 Check Surroundings STOP NOTE:

It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.

 

 

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position. The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward. Check Surroundings Shift To Drive When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Check Surroundings Move Forward When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. NOTE:

It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required. Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. Check Surroundings Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings STOP 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245 When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position"

message will be momentarily displayed. STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire. Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to Parallel message will appear in the instrument cluster display. 5 Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. Check Surroundings Move Backward Active ParkSense Complete Check Parking Position Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the Active ParkSense Searching -

Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular message will show in the instrument cluster display. Active ParkSense Searching 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246 246 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE:

When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated. The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions

(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.). The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles). The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver). When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence. Space Found Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular

(depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible. Space Found Keep Moving Forward Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicles movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel. Space Found Shift To Reverse 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247 When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. NOTE:

Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. Check Surroundings Move Backward It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-

matic parking maneuver. When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually. The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled. STARTING AND OPERATING 247 If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle. When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. 5 Check Surroundings STOP NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position. The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward. Check Surroundings Shift To Drive When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Check Surroundings Move Forward When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicles movement. NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required. Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. Check Surroundings Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings STOP 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249 When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete. Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position" message will be momentarily displayed. Check Surroundings Wait For Steering To Complete The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward. Active ParkSense Complete Check Parking Position STARTING AND OPERATING 249 WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or perpendicular parking maneu-

vers even when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehi-

cles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 5

(Continued) Check Surroundings Move Backward 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. CAUTION!

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-

nize every obstacle, including small obsta-

cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-

mended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. LANESENSE IF EQUIPPED LaneSense Operation The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual warnings through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. NOTE:

When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the drivers hands are on the steering wheel and provide an audible warning to the driver when the drivers hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251 Turning LaneSense On Or Off The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED in LaneSense button will be illuminated while the system is deactivated. NOTE:

The LaneSense system will retain the last system state (on or off) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A LaneSense On message is shown in the instrument cluster display. LaneSense Warning Message The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display. When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Left Lane Departure Only Left Lane Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-

Sense telltale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an uninten-

tional lane departure occurs. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane depar-

ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow. 5 LaneSense On Message To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button once (LED turns on). System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252 252 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected. Left Lane Departure Both Lanes Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is on to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-

tale yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. changes from solid green to solid For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane depar-

ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. Lane Sensed With Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253 NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure. Changing LaneSense Status The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. NOTE:

When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h). Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.). PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera 1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display. 2. Press the Backup Camera button to turn the Rear View Camera system on. STARTING AND OPERATING 253 NOTE:

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicles ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the user presses image defeat X to exit out of the camera video display. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254 254 STARTING AND OPERATING When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Zone Red Yellow Green Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) WARNING!

CAUTION!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. Rear Camera Viewing At Speed When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE the Rear View Camera can be activated with the Rear View Camera button in the Controls menu. This feature allows the customer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to 10 seconds while at speed. If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the X button on the touchscreen. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255 REFUELING THE VEHICLE 1. Push the fuel filler door release switch

(located under the headlamp switch). Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2. Open the fuel filler door. NOTE:

In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door. Fuel Filler 3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe seal the system. 4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while refueling. 5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. 6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle. 7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is provided to open the flapper doors to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. 1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area. 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle. 3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors open. 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. 5 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area. WARNING!

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256 256 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top off the fuel tank after filling. Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the center, this will pop up the outboard edge. 3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to disengage snaps. 4. Remove the storage bin. 5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the closed position. VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label Release Cable NOTE:

If the fuel door does not latch after the manual release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should be manually returned to the closed position. As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257 Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed. Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added. Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of STARTING AND OPERATING 257 the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258 258 STARTING AND OPERATING TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label in Starting And Operating for further information. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its

"loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. WARNING!

If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs

(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label in Starting And Operating for further information. WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Tongue Weight (TW) The Tongue Weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Trailer Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259 Trailer Sway Control The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING!

An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision. Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-

turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Class I - Light Duty Class II - Medium Duty Class III - Heavy Duty Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261 STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Non SRT The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:

Engine Model Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Max. Trailer Tongue Trailer Wt.) Wt. (See Note) 3.6L (Std Cooling) 3.6L (Std Cooling) 3.6L (HD Cooling) 3.6L (HD Cooling) 5.7L (Std Cooling) 5.7L (HD Cooling) 4x2 4x4 4x2 4x4 4x4 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 500 lbs (226 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg) 5 Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for further information. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1,678 kg). 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) SRT Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating) Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. Trailer Wt.)

(See Note) 6.2L Supercharged Automatic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 6.4L Automatic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for further information. The manufacturer does not recommend using the run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer. Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal

(Summit Models) If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is located at the bottom center of the rear fascia. 1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn counterclockwise. NOTE:

Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the locking retainer if needed for added leverage. Hitch Receiver Cover 1 Hitch Receiver Cover 2 Locking Retainers 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263 2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward

(towards you), pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver cover. This hitch receiver cover is located at the bottom center of the rear fascia. 1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn counterclockwise. NOTE:

Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the locking retainer if needed for added leverage. STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Hitch Receiver Cover 3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver cover and then pull outwards to remove. 5 Hitch Receiver Cover To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat the procedure in reverse order. NOTE:

Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation. Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal

(SRT Models) If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver cover. This must be removed to access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). Hitch Receiver Cover 1 Hitch Receiver Cover 2 Locking Retainer 2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward

(towards you). Hitch Receiver Cover Removal 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264 264 STARTING AND OPERATING To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat the procedure in reverse order. NOTE:

Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation. Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Weight Distribution CAUTION!

Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

The tongue weight of the trailer. The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE:

Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information in this chapter for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo placard for your vehicle. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended. CAUTION!

Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled Servicing. Refer to Scheduled Servicing in Servicing And Maintenance for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265 WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) Vehicles with trailers should not be parked compact spare tire. When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do GCWR must not be exceeded. Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-

loading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.

(Continued) on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:

GVWR GTW GAWR Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing while using a full size spare tire. Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for proper tire inflation proce-

dures. Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation 5 pressures before trailer usage. Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for the proper inspection procedure. When replacing tires, refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-

equate braking and possible personal injury. An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). WARNING!

Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-

load your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stop-

ping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. CAUTION!

NOTE:

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs

(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicles electrical connect) into water. Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area. Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. Four-Pin Connector 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 4 Park 5 Left Stop/Turn 6 Right Stop/Turn 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267 Seven-Pin Connector 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop/Turn 4 Electric Brakes 5 Ground 6 Left Stop/Turn 7 Running Lamps Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. Automatic Transmission Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear. Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW mode, or use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear. NOTE:

Using a lower gear (using the AutoStick shift control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-

sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking. STARTING AND OPERATING 267 NOTE:

Using TOW mode, or selecting a lower gear

(using the AutoStick shift control) while oper-

ating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking. TOW Mode To reduce the potential for automatic transmission overheating, select TOW mode when driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear

(using the AutoStick shift paddles) on more severe grades. AutoStick When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent down-

shifts. For example, choose 5 if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose 4 or 3 if needed to maintain the desired speed. To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow. 5 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Speed Control If Equipped Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads. When using the Speed Control, if you experi-

ence speed drops greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

City Driving In city traffic while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. Highway Driving Reduce speed. Temporarily turn off air conditioning. SNOW PLOW Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision. WARNING!

Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle. This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Two-Wheel Drive Ground Models Four-Wheel Drive Models Without 4-LO Range Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4-LO Range STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions Transmission in PARK Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) Tow in forward direction 5 Disconnect negative battery NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK cable NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK Dolly Tow On Trailer Front Rear ALL NOTE:

Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT vehicles. These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. NOT ALLOWED OK OK NOTE:

When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to Quadra-Lift in Starting and Operating for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode

(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. NOTE:

If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission into PARK. 4. Turn the ignition OFF. 5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturers instructions. 6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position. CAUTION!

Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Recreational Towing Quadra-Trac I

(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case. NOTE:

This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Recreational Towing QuadraTrac II/

QuadraDrive II Four-Wheel Drive Models The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL

(N) and the transmission must be in PARK (P) for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL selection button is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the selector switch in any mode position. CAUTION!

DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground

(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-

sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271 Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. CAUTION! (Continued) Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case. The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL (N) to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis-

sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged. WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing:

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, with the engine running. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. STARTING AND OPERATING 271 4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. 5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will appear in the instrument cluster. 5 NEUTRAL (N) Button 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272 272 STARTING AND OPERATING 6. After the shift is completed and the 14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. suitable tow bar. 15. Release the parking brake. 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. 8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement. 9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL. 10. Firmly apply the parking brake. 11. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine turns off. 12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. Release the brake pedal. 13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice

(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition to the OFF mode. NOTE:

Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indi-

cator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL

(N) button is released. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indi-

cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. suspension, the engine should be started and left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicles ride height to compensate for temperature effects. Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Start the engine. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push 12. Press and hold the brake pedal. and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second. 13. Release the parking brake. 14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally. NOTE:

Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all require-

ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indi-

cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. DRIVING TIPS On-Road Driving Tips Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. 5 NEUTRAL (N) Switch 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch. 8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine off. 9. Release the brake pedal. 10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. 11. Start the engine. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Off-Road Driving Tips NOTE:

Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit models that are also equipped with an Off Road Package, remove the lower fascia to prevent damage. The lower fascia is attached to the lower part of the front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand. The front license plate bracket must be removed first if equipped. Front Air Dam 1 Front Bumper 2 Front Air Dam Fasteners NOTE:

On Summit models the lower front fascia is not removable. Lower Front Fascia Removal:

1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners. 2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage lower fascia from the upper fascia. Grasp the portion inside the wheel well. Pulling it downwards and toward you, separate the tabs from the slots in the upper fascia. 3. Continue working your way across the vehicle, separating the remaining tabs from the slots in the upper fascia. NOTE:

Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower and upper fascia may result. 4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location. NOTE:

It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). This radar sensor is specifically calibrated to your vehicle and is not inter-

changeable with other radar sensors. Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):

1. With the lower fascia removed, which provides access to the sensor and bracket, disconnect the wiring harness from the sensor. 2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip from the bracket. NOTE:

Before the next step, it is recommended to scribe location to assist in reinstallation. 3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners that hold the sensor bracket to the bumper beam. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275 4. Locate the protective connector on the rear 7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place. Lower Front Fascia Installation of the bumper beam. STARTING AND OPERATING 275 NOTE:

All Speed Control functions will be disabled when the radar sensor is disconnected. Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):

1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the protective connector on the bumper beam. 2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in protective connector. NOTE:

This will only work if you have a helper. 1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage a sufficient number of tabs to support the weight of the lower fascia

(typically one or two tabs) into the upper fascia. 2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs into the slots on one side of the vehicle. 3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat Step 2 to the opposite side of the vehicle. 5 3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall the radar sensor and bracket using the two fasteners. NOTE:

Bumper Beam 1 Inside Bumper Beam 2 Protective Connector Location 3 Sensor Bracket Fasteners 4 Sensor Bracket NOTE:

Only models with the Off Road Package are equipped with the a protective connector. 5. Remove the plug from the protective connector and install on the sensor. 6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the protective connector. NOTE:

Some alignment may be required upon fascia installation to align sensor with fascia. 4. Install the wiring harness connector into the radar sensor. NOTE:

If you receive a fault, see an authorized dealer they may need to perform a sensor alignment. It may be necessary to apply additional force to individual tabs to make sure they are fully engaged. Do not use any tools to apply additional force to the tabs as damage to the upper and lower fascias may result. 4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Quadra-Lift If Equipped When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be raised as required by the changes in terrain. The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec-Terrain switch position. The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting And Operating for further information. When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range. WARNING!

CAUTION!

When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph

(8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects. Do not drive in 4WD LOW Range on dry pavement; driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range locks front and rear drivelines together and does not allow for differential action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery surfaces. Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water. NOTE:

Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle's heating and venti-

lation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277 Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting. Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). Maintenance After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage. Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to Four-Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control. Hill Climbing NOTE:

Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions at the crest and/or on the other side. Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills. STARTING AND OPERATING 277 If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly down the hill, allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires. WARNING!

If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake. 5 Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. Always drive straight up or down. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction Downhill When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking. If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control use the following procedure:

Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction. When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible. After Driving Off-Road Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it. Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage. Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required. Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-

nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual. Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts. After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible. WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary. If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-

ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls. NOTE:

With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may discharge the battery. ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Assist And SOS Mirror 1 SOS Button 2 ASSIST Button If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a SOS button. 279 WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-

tion if you are connected to an operable LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. 6 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280 280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:

Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle youre driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-

tance. SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian. other vehicle issues. SOS Call Mirror. 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional assistance is needed. WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. NOTE:

In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror. 2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made. a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:

Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call The vehicle brand The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281 NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. Once a connection is made between the vehicles SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional assis-

tance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicles SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicles SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection. 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger The SOS Call system is embedded into the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281

(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. Never place anything on or near the vehicles operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

(Continued) vehicles electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicles electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-

ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment

(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicles electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. 6 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282 282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SOS Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities. SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red. The Device Screen will display the following message Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer. An In-Vehicle Audio message will state Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer. WARNING!

Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately. Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLCs control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. facility These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

Delayed accessories mode is active The ignition is in the OFF position The vehicles electrical systems are not intact The SOS Call system software and/or hard-

ware are damaged during a crash The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator Operator error by the SOS operator LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion Weather tunnels Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283 NOTE:

General Information WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. Never place anything on or near the vehicles LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283 CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

6 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284 284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs Bulb Name Glove Compartment Lamp Grab Handle Lamp Overhead Console Reading Lamps Rear Cargo Lamp Visor Vanity Lamp Underpanel Courtesy Lamps Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) Telltale/Hazard Lamp Bulb Name Headlamps (Low Beam) If Equipped Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) Headlamps (High Beam) If Equipped Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Interior Bulbs Non SRT Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number 194 L002825W5W VT4976 2142 V26377 906 103 74 Bulb Number H11 H9 D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285 Bulb Name Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker If Equipped Premium Front Side Marker If Equipped Front Park/Turn Lamp If Equipped Rear Body Side Backup Lamp Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps Liftgate Backup Lamps Rear License Lamps Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps Rear Body Side Tail Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Non SRT Exterior Bulbs IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285 Bulb Number H11 W5W LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 7444NA (WY28/8W) 7440 (W21W) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 921 (W16W) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 6 NOTE:

Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286 286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Bulb Name Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Premium Front Fog Lamps Premium Front Side Marker Rear Body Side Backup Lamps Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps Liftgate Backup Lamps Rear License Lamps Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps Rear Body Side Tail Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) SRT Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 7440 (W21W) 921 (W16W) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) NOTE:

Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287 Bulb Replacement Halogen Headlamps If Equipped High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. NOTE:

Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back to vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. 1. Open the hood. 2. Access the back of the headlamp. WARNING!

NOTE:

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See an authorized dealer for service. NOTE:

On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the head-

lamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. The air filter housing must be removed. The windshield washer reservoir may need to be rotated out of the way by removing the fastener. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be repositioned by removing the fasteners, and moving the unit out of the way. 3. To access the low beam bulb you must remove the rubber boot seal from backside of the lamp housing. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287 Rubber Boot Seal NOTE:

Ensure the rubber boot is properly reinstalled to prevent water and moisture from entering the lamp. 6 CAUTION!

Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288 288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Turn the low or high beam bulb a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb. Front Turn Signal Lamp The front turn signal lamps are LEDs. See an authorized dealer for service. 1. Open the hood. 2. Access the back of the headlamp. NOTE:

The air filter housing must be removed. The windshield washer reservoir may need to be rotated out of the way by removing the fastener. Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be repositioned by removing the fasteners, and moving the unit out of the way. 3. Turn the turn signal bulb a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb. 3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel. 4. Twist socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp. CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. Front Fog Lamps Please see an authorized dealer for service. Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps 1. Raise the liftgate. 2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing. Rear Of Tail Lamp 1 Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket 2 LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove 3 Backup Bulb Socket 5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. 6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the lamp assembly. Tail Lamp Push Pins 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 3. Continue removing the trim. 4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights. 5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counterclockwise. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) The center high mounted stop lamp (CHMSL) is an LED. Service at an authorized dealer. Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps 1. Raise the liftgate. 2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from the liftgate. Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp 1 Auxiliary LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove 2 Backup Bulb Socket Rear License Lamp The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an authorized dealer for service. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 6 6. Remove/replace bulb(s). 7. Reinstall the socket(s). 8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim. Liftgate Lower Trim

 

 

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290 290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY FUSES WARNING!

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, trans-

mission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. General Information Underhood Fuses The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge. The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment on the passengers side, next to the battery terminal posts. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Blade Fuses 1 Fuse Element 2 Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element 3 Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-

ement (blown fuse) Power Distribution Center 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F03 F05 F06 F07 F09 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F17 F19 F20 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 60 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291 Radiator Fan If Equipped Compressor for Air Suspension If Equipped Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump Starter Solenoid Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake Vacuum Pump Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2 Trailer Tow Electric Brake If Equipped Body Controller #3/Power Locks Blower Motor Front Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1 Low Temperature Radiator (LTR) Engine Cooling Pump If Equipped 6 Headlamp Washer If Equipped Headrest Solenoid If Equipped Passenger Door Module Engine Control Module Interior Lights #1 Driver Door Module Front Wipers Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module, ECU and Valves 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292 292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F28 F29 F30 F32 F34 F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F42 F44 F45 F49 F50 F51 F53 F56 20 Amp Blue 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 25 Amp Clear 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Backup Lights If Equipped Trailer Tow Parking Lights If Equipped Trailer Tow (Receptacle) / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) /

Trailer Tow (BUX) If Equipped Drive Train Control Module Slip Differential Control If Equipped Sunroof - If Equipped Rear Defroster Rear Blower Motor If Equipped Power Inverter 115V AC If Equipped Power Liftgate If Equipped 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling 20 Amp Yellow Horn 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow Diagnostic Port Cyber Security Gateway Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential - If Equipped 15 Amp Blue KIN/RF HUB/Steering Column Lock If Equipped 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Turn/Stop Lights If Equipped 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel Engine Only) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor If Equipped IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293 F57 F58 F59 F60 F61 F62 F63 F64 F66 F67 F68 F69 F70 F71 F72 F73 F75 F76 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red HID Headlamps LH If Equipped Purging Pump (Diesel Engine Only) Transmission Control Module Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel Engine Only) 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors / Short Runner Valve Actuator If Equipped (Gas) Urea Heater (Diesel) 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Rain Sensor/Inside Rear View Mirror / USB Port /

DSCR / DTV If Equipped 6 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/UCI Port/USB Charging Port 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed If Equipped 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor 30 Amp Green Amplifier/ANCM If Equipped 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red ECM HID Headlamp RT If Equipped Dual Batt Control If Equipped Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294 294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Cavity Cartridge Fuse Description F77 F78 F80 F81 F82 F83 F84 F85 F86 F87 F88 F92 F93 F94 F95 F96 F90/F91 Micro Fuse 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module If Equipped 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-Intrusion Module If Equipped/Siren If Equipped 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights If Equipped Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV If Equipped 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Fuel Door Instrument Cluster Airbag Module Airbag Module Air Suspension If Equipped 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW/ITBM If Equipped 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats/Cargo Area) Selectable 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp If Equipped 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module Rear Camera / Blind Spot Sensor If Equipped Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger If Equipped 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F97 F98 F99 F100 F101 F102 F103 F104 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats/Front Heated Seats If Equipped 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/HALF/

Park Assist Active Damping If Equipped In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor Spare Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC If Equipped 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console/Rear Cargo If Equipped) 6 CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) When installing the power distribution When replacing a blown fuse, it is important center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.

(Continued) to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296 296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Run Flat Tires WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. SRT models are equipped with run flat tires. Run flat tires allow the vehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph

(88 km/h). Tire service should be obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature usage. WARNING!

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated. Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced. You could have a collision and be severely or fatally injured. Jack Location The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in the rear cargo area, below the load floor. Spare Tire/Jack And Tools 1 Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel 2 Jack 3 Tire Changing Tools 4 Spare Tire NOTE:

The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For vehicles not equipped with a spare tire, the fuel filler funnel is stored in the left storage bin under the load floor. For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System, refer to Refueling The Vehicle in Starting And Oper-

ating for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297 Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut. Secured Spare Tire Preparations For Jacking CAUTION!

Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct jacking points. Failure to follow this information could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody components. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery surfaces. WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P). 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the drivers front tire, block the passengers rear wheel. Wheel Blocked IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297 NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being lifted or raised. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, refer to Quadra-Lift If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information on disabling automatic leveling. Jacking Instructions 6 WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298 298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING! (Continued) Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. Jack Warning Label CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage. Turn the wing nut counter-

clockwise to remove the spare tire. Removing Spare Tire 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts, using the lug wrench by turning them counterclockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still on the ground. Loosen Lug Nuts 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299 3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. 4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged. NOTE:

Depending on vehicle trim level, certain models come equipped with Rock Rails which have a different front lifting point location. Also, the triangular symbols are not visible for this trim package. Jack And Tool Assembly IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299 Front Lifting Point - Rock Rail NOTE:

The jack must be placed straight on with handle facing outwards. See the following Front Jacking Location images for reference. The position of the front jack is the same for all trim levels. 6 Jacking Locations Front Lifting Point Front Jacking Location 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300 300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE:

The rear lifting point location is the same for all trim levels. Front Jacking Location - Rock Rail 5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged. CAUTION!

Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper engagement location on the inside of the panel. Damage of the vehicle may occur if the procedure is not properly followed. Rear Lifting Point Rear Lifting Point - Rock Rail Rear Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location - Rock Rail 6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301 WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. 8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque, refer to Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-

cations in Technical Specifications for further information. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station. 6 Tighten Lug Nuts 11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray. Mounting Spare Tire WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302 302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the road wheel in the cargo area. Turn the wing nut clockwise until secured. Storing Road Wheel 13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 Nm), reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the rear load floor cover. NOTE:

Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. Road Tire Installation 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 4. Refer to Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-

cations in Technical Specifications for proper lug nut torque for further information. 5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303 CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-

tions and precautions. Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger's front seat. There are remote terminals located under the hood to assist in jump starting. Under Hood Jump Starting Location IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303 WARNING!

Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 6 NOTE:

Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not touch each other, or either vehicle, until properly connected for jump starting. Jump Starting Locations

(+) Remote Positive Post (Covered With Protec-

tive Cap)

(-) Remote Negative Post 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304 304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it. 4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump Starting Procedure WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. NOTE:

Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. CAUTION!

Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305 Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative

(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive

(+) jumper cable from the remote positive

(+) post of the discharged vehicle. 5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle have the battery and charging system tested at an authorized dealer. CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicles battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicles battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. REFUELING IN EMERGENCY IF EQUIPPED The fuel filling procedure for in case of an emergency is described in the Emergency Gas Can Refueling procedure. Refer to Refueling The Vehicle in Starting And Operating for further information. The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel. If refueling is necessary, while using an approved gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305 Refueling Funnel Inserting Funnel 6 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306 306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. On the highways slow down. In city traffic while stopped, place the trans-

mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes. NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. WARNING!

MANUAL PARK RELEASE You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the drivers seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307 Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away from the console hinges. Manual Park Release Cover 3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal latch in towards the tether strap. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307 CAUTION!

Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is activated may damage the Manual Park Release mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest. NOTE:

To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-

ally, firmly apply the parking brake. To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:

Release Latch 5. While the metal latch is in the open position, pull upward on the tether strap until the lever clicks and latches in the released position. The transmission is now out of PARK (P) and the vehicle can be moved. 1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply tension upward while pushing the release latch towards the tether to unlock the lever. 6 Released Position Release Latch 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308 308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly and locks into position. Stowed Position NOTE:

Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator. NOTE:

Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R). Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine. NOTE:

Push the ESC OFF switch, to place the Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Safety for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF switch again to restore ESC On mode. WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309 CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

(Continued) Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission over-

heating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph

(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting And Operating section for further information. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309 NOTE:

Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to Quadra-Lift in Starting and Operating for further information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific tire tie-down nets. Failure to follow these instruc-

tions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension. 6 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310 310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Towing Condition Two-Wheel Drive Models Models Without 4WD Wheels OFF The Ground Four-Wheel Drive LOW Range Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Four-Wheel Drive Models With 4WD LOW Range See Instructions Transmission in PARK (P) Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) Tow in forward direction If transmission is operable:

Transmission in NEUTRAL

(N) speed 30 mph (48 km/h) max 30 miles (48 km) max distance Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow On Trailer Front Rear ALL NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD OK NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturers instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing. CAUTION!

Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-

sion components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. NOTE:

SRT vehicles and 4WD models without 4WD LOW range should only be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311 Two-Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this chapter for instructions on shifting the trans-

mission to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off. rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON the ground. CAUTION!

Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph Four-Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

(48 km/h). The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311 If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for further information. Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground. CAUTION!

6 Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis-

sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312 312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's side of the vehicle. NOTE:

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE SRT The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to Manual Park Release in this chapter for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for loading onto a flatbed truck. WARNING!

Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-

gaged, causing serious injury. CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING Scheduled Servicing Non-SRT Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed. Severe operating conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles

(805 km). An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km);

12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment, or is operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder and fill as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights 313 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314 314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Maintenance Plan Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the following pages for required maintenance. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

Change oil and filter. Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. Inspect the CV/Universal joints. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake. Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace the engine air cleaner filter, if necessary. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections Inspect the CV/Universal joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. Inspect transfer case fluid. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace the air conditioning filter. Replace spark plugs.1 0 0 0 0 3

, 3 0 0 0 8 4

, X X X 0 0 0 0 2

, 2 0 0 0 2 3

, X X X X X 0 0 0 0 4

, 4 0 0 0 4 6

, X X X X X 0 0 0 0 5

, 5 0 0 0 0 8

, X 0 0 0 0 7

, 7 0 0 0 2 1 1

, X 0 0 0 0 6

, 6 0 0 0 6 9

, X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0 8

, 8 0 0 0 8 2 1

, X X X X X 0 0 0 0 9

, 9 0 0 0 4 4 1

, X X X 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 10 0 0 0 0 6 1

, X X X X X X SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 11 0 0 0 6 7 1

, X 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 13 0 0 0 8 0 2

, X 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 12 0 0 0 2 9 1

, X X X X X X 14 15 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 2

, X X X 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 4 2 2

, X X X X X 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316 316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace accessory drive belt. Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and pulley, replace if necessary. Change transfer case fluid. Replace PCV valve 0 0 0 0 2

, 2 0 0 0 2 3

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 3 0 0 0 8 4

, 0 0 0 0 4

, 4 0 0 0 4 6

, 0 0 0 0 5

, 5 0 0 0 0 8

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 6 0 0 0 6 9

, 0 0 0 0 7

, 7 0 0 0 2 1 1

, 0 0 0 0 8

, 8 0 0 0 8 2 1

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 9 0 0 0 4 4 1

, 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 13 0 0 0 8 0 2

, 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 4 2 2

, 14 15 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 2

, X X X 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 11 0 0 0 6 7 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 12 0 0 0 2 9 1

, X 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 10 0 0 0 0 6 1

, X X 1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317 WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317 Scheduled Servicing SRT NOTE:

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect the vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. The instrument cluster display will display an Oil Change Required message and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated. Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first. An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster Display in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel for further information. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318 318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE At Each Stop For Fuel Check the engine oil level. Refer to Engine Once A Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter. Compartment in this section for further information. wear or damage. Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the Check the windshield washer solvent and terminals as required. add if required. Inspect the brake hoses and lines. Inspect the CV/Universal joints. CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, engine oil, brake master cylinder, and add as needed. Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319 Maintenance Plan Or Kilometers:

Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before scheduled maintenance. If using your vehicle for any of the following: dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the exhaust system. Miles:

0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 6 3

, 0 0 0 2 4

, 0 0 0 8 4

, 0 0 0 4 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 6 6

, 0 0 0 2 7

, 0 0 0 8 7

, 0 0 0 4 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 6 9

, Or Months:

2 6 1 8 1 4 2 0 3 6 3 2 4 8 4 4 5 0 6 6 6 2 7 8 7 4 8 0 9 6 9 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 0 4

, 0 0 0 0 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 0 7

, 0 0 0 0 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 0 6 1

, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319 0 0 0 2 0 1

, 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 7 1

, 0 0 0 8 0 1

, 8 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 1 1

, 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 9 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 2

, 0 0 0 6 2 1

, 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 2

, 0 0 0 2 3 1

, 2 3 1 0 0 0 0 2 2

, 0 0 0 8 3 1

, 8 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 2

, 0 0 0 4 4 1

, 4 4 1 0 0 0 0 4 2

, 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 5 2

, X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320 320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Or Kilometers:

Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Drain the transfer case and refill. Inspect the accessory drive belts replace if necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. Change if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing. Miles:

0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 6 3

, 0 0 0 2 4

, 0 0 0 8 4

, 0 0 0 4 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 6 6

, 0 0 0 2 7

, 0 0 0 8 7

, 0 0 0 4 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 6 9

, Or Months:

2 6 1 8 1 4 2 0 3 6 3 2 4 8 4 4 5 0 6 6 6 2 7 8 7 4 8 0 9 6 9 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 0 4

, 0 0 0 0 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 0 7

, 0 0 0 0 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 0 6 1

, 0 0 0 2 0 1

, 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 7 1

, 0 0 0 8 0 1

, 8 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 1 1

, 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 9 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 2

, 0 0 0 6 2 1

, 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 2

, 0 0 0 2 3 1

, 2 3 1 0 0 0 0 2 2

, 0 0 0 8 3 1

, 8 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 2

, 0 0 0 4 4 1

, 4 4 1 0 0 0 0 4 2

, X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 5 2

, X X 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321 Or Kilometers:

Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the air conditioning filter. Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary Replace the spark plugs 6.2L Supercharged Engine. 1 Miles:

0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 6 3

, 0 0 0 2 4

, 0 0 0 8 4

, 0 0 0 4 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 6 6

, 0 0 0 2 7

, 0 0 0 8 7

, 0 0 0 4 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 6 9

, Or Months:

2 6 1 8 1 4 2 0 3 6 3 2 4 8 4 4 5 0 6 6 6 2 7 8 7 4 8 0 9 6 9 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 0 4

, 0 0 0 0 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 0 7

, 0 0 0 0 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 0 6 1

, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321 0 0 0 2 0 1

, 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 7 1

, 0 0 0 8 0 1

, 8 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 1 1

, 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 9 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 2

, 0 0 0 6 2 1

, 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 2

, 0 0 0 2 3 1

, 2 3 1 0 0 0 0 2 2

, 0 0 0 8 3 1

, 8 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 2

, 0 0 0 4 4 1

, 4 4 1 0 0 0 0 4 2

, 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 5 2

, X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 X X 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322 322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Or Kilometers:

Replace the spark plugs 6.4L Engine. 2 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not done at 150,000 miles

(240,000 km). Miles:

0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 6 3

, 0 0 0 2 4

, 0 0 0 8 4

, 0 0 0 4 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 6 6

, 0 0 0 2 7

, 0 0 0 8 7

, 0 0 0 4 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 6 9

, Or Months:

2 6 1 8 1 4 2 0 3 6 3 2 4 8 4 4 5 0 6 6 6 2 7 8 7 4 8 0 9 6 9 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 2

, 0 0 0 0 3

, 0 0 0 0 4

, 0 0 0 0 5

, 0 0 0 0 6

, 0 0 0 0 7

, 0 0 0 0 8

, 0 0 0 0 9

, 0 0 0 0 0 1

, 0 0 0 0 1 1

, 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 0 0 0 3 1

, 0 0 0 0 4 1

, 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 0 0 2 0 1

, 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 7 1

, 0 0 0 8 0 1

, 8 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 1

, 0 0 0 4 1 1

, 4 1 1 0 0 0 0 9 1

, 0 0 0 6 2 1

, 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 2

, 0 0 0 2 3 1

, 2 3 1 0 0 0 0 2 2

, 0 0 0 8 3 1

, 8 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 2

, 0 0 0 4 4 1

, 4 4 1 0 0 0 0 4 2

, 0 0 0 0 6 1

, X 0 0 0 0 2 1

, 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 2

, X 0 0 0 0 5 1

, 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 5 2

, X 1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply. 2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply. WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

(Continued) Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323 7 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 2 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Engine Oil Fill 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 9 Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324 324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 5.7L Engine 1 Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 2 Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 3 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 4 Engine Oil Fill 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator) 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325 6.2L Supercharged Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325 7 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 2 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 4 Engine Oil Fill 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator) 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 11 Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326 326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 6.4L Engine 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 2 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Air Cleaner Filter 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator) 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 10 Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327 Checking Oil Level Adding Washer Fluid To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicles engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines. CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. The instrument cluster display will indicate when the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed. The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327 WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to Jump Starting Procedure in In Case Of Emer-

gency for further information. 7

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328 328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING! (Continued) Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. CAUTION!

It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the nega-

tive cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage. Pressure Washing CAUTION!

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed. DEALER SERVICE An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Engine Oil Change Engine Oil Non-SRT Refer to Scheduled Servicing in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329 Change Engine Oil SRT The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to Scheduled Servicing for further information. NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever occurs first. Engine Oil Selection Non-SRT For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395. Engine Oil Selection SRT For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent Mopar oil meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. The engine oil fill cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil fill location, refer to Engine Compartment in this section for further information. CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329 CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 3.6L Engine Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330 330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 5.7L Engine Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section. NOTE:

Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Tech-

nology. Refer to Fuel Saver Technology If Equipped in Starting And Operating for further information. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Engine Oil Viscosity 6.2L/6.4L Engine Use Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 engine or equivalent Mopar oil meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to Engine Compartment in this section for further information. Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331 NOTE:

Be sure to follow the Severe Duty Conditions maintenance interval if applicable. WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement Except 6.2L Supercharged Engine Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and/or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris, change the air cleaner filter. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover. Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 Air Cleaner Cover 2 Spring Clips SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331 2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly 1 Air Cleaner Cover 2 Air Cleaner Filter 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332 332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly. 3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly. Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement 6.2L Supercharged Engine Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris, you should change your air cleaner filter. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Loosen the fasteners on the air cleaner filter cover. Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly 1 Air Cleaner Filter Cover 2 Air Cleaner Filter 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly. Air Cleaner Filter Assembly 1 Fasteners 2 Air Cleaner Filter Cover 2. Lift the air filter cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 1 Air Cleaner Filter Air Cleaner Filter Removal Air Cleaner Filter 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element. 1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward. 2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element. 1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward. 2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs. 3. Tighten the fasteners to lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, the air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. WARNING!

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-

cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unap-

proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, for further warranty information. The air conditioning system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a If Equipped R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and refrigerants. 7 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-1234yf If Equipped R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334 334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter) Refer to Scheduled Servicing in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents. NOTE:

When disengaging the glove compartment door from its hinges, there will be some resistance. 4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment door. Right Side Of Glove Compartment 1 Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 Glove Compartment Door Glove Compartment 1 Glove Compartment Travel Stops 2 Glove Compartment Tension Tether 3 Glove Compartment Door 2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides of the glove compartment door, partially close the glove compartment door and push inward to release the glove compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this procedure for the opposite side. 3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335 5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the 7. retaining tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right side to fully remove the cover. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover. NOTE:

Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. CAUTION!

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335 The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. 8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door hinge and reattach the tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compartment door. 9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage the glove compartment travel stops. WARNING!

Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running. When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a compe-

tent mechanic. 7 A/C Air Filter Cover 1 Retaining Tab 2 Mid Way Snap 3 Filter Cover Hinge 6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336 336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) Conditions that would require replacement:

Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-

rated from belt body) Rib or belt wear Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs) Belt slips Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley) Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed) Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment. Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337 NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

Wear or uneven edges Foreign material Hardening or cracking Deformation or fatigue If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged. Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337 arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm. CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position 1 Wiper Blade 2 Release Tab 3 Wiper Arm 7 Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 1 Wiper 2 Release Tab 3 Wiper Arm 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove Installing The Front Wipers Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338 338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm). Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Arm 3 Release Tab 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield. 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE:

The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Arm 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. Installing The Rear Wiper NOTE:

Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap. 4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage. Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Blade 3 Wiper Arm 3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm. 1 Wiper Blade 2 Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm Receptacle 4 Wiper Arm 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE:

The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. 3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place. 7 4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340 340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to Safety Tips in Safety for further information.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you Damage to the catalytic converter can park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. CAUTION!

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seri-

ously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.

(Continued) result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-

mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341 In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-

mission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle. Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc-

tioning operating conditions. Cooling System WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-

cally and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not. When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341 Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342 342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant

(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-

ucts, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information. NOTE:

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-

sion protection. Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-

freeze) or any globally compatible coolant

(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant

(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-

mended. Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant

(antifreeze):

We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/

Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34F

(37C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance. Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/

engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343 NOTE:

It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-

rized dealer. Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/

recovery tank if so equipped. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING!

Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343 in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/

coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344 344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Points To Remember NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compart-

ment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-

mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant

(antifreeze) to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing. If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-

tions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-

tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum compo-

nents. Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-

mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-

factory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Brake System In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for leaks. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345 WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued) Use only manufacturer's recommended Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can brake fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubri-

cants in Technical Specifications for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-

voir. To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reser-

voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.

(Continued) result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345 NOTE:

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for fluid specifications. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid

(ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346 346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check the transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Front/Rear Axle Fluid For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information. Front Axle Fluid Level Check The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 Nm). CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak. Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 Nm). CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak. Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347 Transfer Case Fluid Level Check For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information. Adding Fluid While the vehicle is in a level position, add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole. Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to Fluids And Lubricants in Technical Specifications for further information. RAISING THE VEHICLE In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station. TIRES Tire Safety Information Drain First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 Nm). Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. CAUTION!

When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could damage them and cause them to leak. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347 Tire Markings Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Standards Code

(TIN) 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-

ture Grades 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348 348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOTE:

P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. Tire Sizing Chart European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M. Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT EXAMPLE:

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349 EXAMPLE:

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description:

95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349 H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or 7 LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350 350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Identification Number (TIN) The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 EXAMPLE:

DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:

031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Tire Loading And Tire Pressure NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351 Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicles loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 7 Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352 352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire And Loading Information Placard Tires General Information Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety Fuel Economy Tread Wear Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:

Safety Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. WARNING!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. can cause collisions. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.

(Continued) NOTE:

WARNING! (Continued) Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353 Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi

(7 kPa) per 12F (7C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353 Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi

(7 kPa) for every 12F (7C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi

(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354 354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph

(120 km/h). Radial Ply Tires WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

The tire has not been driven on when flat. The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). The puncture is no greater than a of an inch (6 mm). Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused. Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in In Case Of Emergency for further information. WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

Driving style Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment Distance driven Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended. Tire Tread 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information. WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355 NOTE:

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356 356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-

proved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons

(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40F

(5C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357 Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit in In Case Of Emergency for further information. CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Refer to the Towing Requirements - Tires in Starting And Operating for restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for temporary emergency use. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357 If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358 358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Collapsible Spare Tire If Equipped The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Collapsible spare tire description example:

165/80-17 101P. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire. WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359 WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the drivers side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359 The wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheels protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. CAUTION!

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 7 NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing the vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive the vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360 360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. Tire Chains and Traction Devices Non-SRT Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. Install on rear tires only. Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro or equivalent is recommended on P245/70R17, 265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires. WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued) Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. Observe the traction device manufacturers instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturers if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Using tires of different size and type

(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction device clear-

ance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only trac-

tion devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile

(0.8 km). Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361 Tire Chains and Traction Devices SRT Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. Install on rear tires only. Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP 4X4 or Equivalent is recommended on 295/45R20 tires. WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361 CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction device clear-

ance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only trac-

tion devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile

(0.8 km). Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

(Continued) Observe the traction device manufacturers instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturers if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Tire Rotation Recommendations The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362 362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. NOTE:

The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation. The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram. Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363 WARNING!

BODYWORK SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363 Temperature Grades The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. STORING THE VEHICLE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:

Disconnect the negative cable from battery. Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Protection From Atmospheric Agents Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364 364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are:

Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. Stone and gravel impact. Insects, tree sap and tar. Salt in the air near seacoast localities. Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Body And Underbody Maintenance Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Preserving The Bodywork Washing Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-

riage at least once a month. It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-

sibility of the owner. If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. INTERIORS Seats And Fabric Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365 Plastic And Coated Parts Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-

tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause perma-

nent damage. Wipe away immediately. Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 7 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366 366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Leather Parts Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-

mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367 IDENTIFICATION DATA Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. Windshield VIN Label Location NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 367 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light. In the event power assist is lost for any reason

(i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. NOTE:

Due to the performance nature of our brake systems, some noise is to be expected. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket. Torque Specifications Base Model Vehicle Lug Nut/Bolt

**Lug Nut/

Torque Bolt Size Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size 130 Ft-Lbs

(176 Nm) SRT Model Vehicle M14 x 1.50 22 mm 8 Lug Nut/Bolt

**Lug Nut/

Torque Bolt Size Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size 110 Ft-Lbs

(149 Nm) M14 x 1.50 22 mm

 

 

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368 368 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3.6L Engine Torque Patterns WARNING!

Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/

bolt (do not insert it half way). To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. NOTE:

If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station. Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine. This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded Regular gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the

(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane Premium gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over Regular gasoline in these engines. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see an dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 369 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. 5.7L Engine 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine Reformulated Gasoline Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine. Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine. This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane Plus gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded Premium gasoline having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by the

(R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane Premium gasoline is required in these engines. While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Materials Added To Fuel 8 Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370 370 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

Operate in a lean mode. OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on. Poor engine performance. Poor cold start and cold drivability. Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol

(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371 MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. Fuel System Cautions CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles performance:

The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.

(Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) Carbon Monoxide Warnings An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-

WARNING!

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 371 tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-

tioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance. The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsi-

bility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. 8 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372 372 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUID CAPACITIES NON-SRT Fuel (Approximate) 3.6L Engine 5.7L Engine Engine Oil With Filter 3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) Cooling System*

3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent) 5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent) Without Trailer Tow Package 5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent) With Trailer Tow Package

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. US Metric 24.6 Gallons 24.6 Gallons 6 Quarts 7 Quarts 93.1 Liters 93.1 Liters 5.6 Liters 6.6 Liters 10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters 15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters 16 Quarts 15.2 Liters 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373 FLUID CAPACITIES SRT Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil With Filter 6.2L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) Cooling System*

6.2L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) 6.2L Engine Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

(240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.) 6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 373 US 24.6 Gallons 8.3 Quarts 7 Quarts Metric 93.1 Liters 7.8 Liters 6.6 Liters 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters 4.0 Quarts 3.9 Liters 16 Quarts 15.5 Liters 8 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374 374 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS NON-SRT Engine Engine Coolant Engine Oil 3.6L Engine Engine Oil 5.7L Engine Engine Oil Filter Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375 Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 3.6L Engine Fuel Selection 5.7L Engine We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85). 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85). CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 375 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

(Continued) This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-

mended. 8 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-

nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant

(antifreeze) or any globally compatible coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376 376 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Chassis Automatic Transmission Transfer Case Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) Axle Differential (Front) Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Transfer Case Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353. Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier. We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. Axle Differential (Rear) With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) Axle Differential (Rear) Without Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) Brake Master Cylinder 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS SRT Engine Engine/Intercooler Coolant Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plug Fuel Selection 6.2L/6.4L Engines Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 377 We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters. We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%

Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85). 8 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378 378 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Chassis Automatic Transmission Transfer Case Single-Speed (Selec-Track Axle Differential (Front) Brake Master Cylinder Axle Differential (Rear) With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85. We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with integrated friction modifier. We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379 UCONNECT SYSTEMS For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C Nav with 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement. NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-

ware for your vehicle. CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. MULTIMEDIA Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed. 379 WARNING!

It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicles systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380 380 MULTIMEDIA NOTE:

FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates. To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com

(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca

(Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates. Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to Data Collection & Privacy in your Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement or Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity in Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel. UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the Customer Programmable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle. Uconnect 4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On Faceplate 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4 Settings button, then press the Press the Apps Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Language, Display, Voice, Clock, Safety/Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &

Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth

(if equipped), Suspension (if equipped), SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings to Default, and Clear Personal Data. NOTE:

Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. MULTIMEDIA 381 NOTE:

All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and make your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382 382 MULTIMEDIA Language After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Language English Franais Selectable Options Espaol NOTE:

When the Language feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Franais / Espaol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, and then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Setting Name Display Mode Display Brightness With Headlights On Off NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights On" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the

"party" or "parade" position. Display Brightness With Headlights NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights Off" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position. Manual

Auto

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383 Setting Name AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon Connection If Equipped Touchscreen Beep Control Screen Time-Out If Equipped On On On Selectable Options MULTIMEDIA 383 Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List Brief Never Selectable Options Detailed With Help Always Clock After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Sync With GPS Time Set Time Hours Set time Minutes Time Format On

12 hrs AM Selectable Options 9 NOTE:

Within the Set Time and Format setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time. Off Off Off Off

24 hrs PM 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384 384 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Set Date If Equipped Selectable Options Up Arrow Down Arrow NOTE:

Within the Set Date setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date. Safety/Driving Assistance After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Delay Selectable Options NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen displays the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay cancels if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. Off Off On On Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines NOTE:

The Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385 MULTIMEDIA 385 Setting Name Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Selectable Options Off Warning Only Warning & Braking NOTE:

Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted. FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the Warning Only option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the Warning & Braking option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you. Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity If Equipped Far Med Near NOTE:

The Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. Far gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas Near will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. ParkSense If Equipped Sound Sound & Display NOTE:

The ParkSense system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound or Sound & Display. 9 Front ParkSense Volume If Equipped Rear ParkSense Volume Low Low Medium Medium High High 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386 386 MULTIMEDIA Rear ParkSense Braking Assist If Setting Name Equipped Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist feature is selected, the Park Assist system detects objects located behind the vehicle and utilizes auton-

omous braking to stop the vehicle. LaneSense Warning If Equipped Early Medium Late NOTE:

The LaneSense Warning setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure. LaneSense Strength If Equipped Blind Spot Alert If Equipped Medium Lights High Lights & Chime NOTE:

When the Blind Spot Alert feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as plays an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the BSM system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to spec-

ification. On Low Off On On On Rain Sensing Auto Wipers If Equipped Hill Start Assist If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse If Equipped Off Off Off Off 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387 Setting Name Paddle Shifters If Equipped Steering Feel Options If Equipped Enable Sport Selectable Options Disable Normal Comfort NOTE:

The Steering Feel Options setting allows you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the Comfort button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort. MULTIMEDIA 387 Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. 9 Headlight Illumination On Approach Headlights With Wipers If Equipped Auto High Beam If Equipped NOTE:

When the Auto High Beam is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. 0 sec 60 sec 0 sec 60 sec On On 30 sec 90 sec 30 sec 90 sec Off Off 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388 388 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Daytime Running Lights Flash Lights With Lock Setting Name Auto Door Locks Auto Unlock On Exit Flash Lights With Lock Sound Horn With Lock Sound Horn With Remote Start If Equipped NOTE:

When the Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase. Selectable Options Doors & Locks After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options NOTE:

The Auto Door Locks feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). NOTE:

When the Auto Unlock On Exit feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and the driver's door is opened. Off 1st Press 2nd Press Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389 Setting Name Remote Door Unlock Selectable Options Driver Door All Doors NOTE:

When Driver is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers doors. When All is programmed, all of the doors unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If All is programmed, all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver is programmed, only the drivers door unlocks when the drivers door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once only results in the drivers door opening once. If the drivers door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). Passive Entry Memory Linked To FOB If Equipped NOTE:

The Memory Linked To FOB feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (drivers seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position, and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. Power Liftgate Alert If Equipped NOTE:

The Power Liftgate Alert feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. On On On MULTIMEDIA 389 Off Off Off 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390 390 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel If Equipped Auto-On Comfort If Equipped After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Off Remote Start All Starts NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the drivers heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn On when temperatures are below 40F

(4.4C). When temperatures are above 80F (26.7C), the driver vented seat will turn on. Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Engine Off Power Delay If Equipped 0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Engine Off Power Delay feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec NOTE:

When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut OFF. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391 Selectable Options MULTIMEDIA 391 Setting Name Easy Exit Seat If Equipped Auto Entry/Exit If Equipped On On NOTE:

When the Easy Exit Seat feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. Off Off NOTE:

The Auto Entry/Exit feature automatically lowers the vehicle ride height position when shifted into PARK, when it is selected. Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Balance/Fade Selectable Options Up Arrow Button Down Arrow Button Left Arrow Button Right Arrow Button Center C Button NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Equalizer Mid Bass Treble 9 NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392 392 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Surround Sound If Equipped Loudness If Equipped NOTE:

This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled. AUX Volume Offset If Equipped On Yes

-3 Selectable Options Off No

+3 NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Auto Play On Off NOTE:

When selecting the Auto Play subsetting, a message will pop up stating USB devices will automatically play media when AutoPlay is turned On. Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Do Not Disturb Selectable Options List of Settings NOTE:

Press Do Not Disturb to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default), and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message). 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393 MULTIMEDIA 393 Setting Name Paired Phones And Audio Devices Selectable Options List of Paired Phones NOTE:

The Paired Phones and Audio Devices feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further infor-

mation, refer to Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display in this section for further information. Display Phone Info In Cluster If Equipped Suspension If Equipped After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Auto Entry/Exit Suspension If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to PARK for easy entry/exit. Display Suspension Messages If Equipped Warnings Only NOTE:

The Display Suspension Messages setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display all suspension messages or to only display suspension warnings. 9 Tire Jack Mode If Equipped NOTE:

When the Tire Jack Mode setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is on a jack, changing a tire. On Off Off Off On All On 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394 394 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Transport Mode If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Transport Mode setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Wheel Alignment Mode If Equipped NOTE:

The Wheel Alignment Mode setting prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Tune Start Selectable Options Off Off On On On Off NOTE:

The Tune Start feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play. Channel Skip List of Channels NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395 MULTIMEDIA 395 Setting Name Subscription Information Selectable Options Sirius ID NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. Restore Settings to Default After pressing the Restore Settings to Default button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Restore Settings to Default Selectable Options Yes Cancel NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396 396 MULTIMEDIA Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings button, then press the Press the Apps Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Language, Display, Voice, Clock, Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirrors and Wipers (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Seats & Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension (if equipped), Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Accessibility (if equipped), Reset, and System Information (if equipped). Clear Personal Data After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Clear Personal Data Selectable Options Yes Cancel NOTE:

When the Clear Personal Data feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. NOTE:

Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting option until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397 Language After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Language English Franais Espaol Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Language feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Franais/Espaol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. MULTIMEDIA 397 Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Setting Name Display Mode Display Brightness With Headlights ON OFF NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position. 9 Display Brightness With Headlights NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position. Manual

Auto

20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398 398 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Set Theme If Equipped Touchscreen Beep Control Screen Timeout If Equipped Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster If Equipped Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster NOTE:

When the Set Theme feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected. Selectable Options Selectable Options On On On On NOTE:

When the Control Screen Timeout feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. NOTE:

When the Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List Brief Never Selectable Options Detailed w/Help Always Off Off Off Off 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399 Clock After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options MULTIMEDIA 399 Setting Name Sync Time With GPS Set Time Hours Set Time Minutes NOTE:

The Set Time Hours feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. NOTE:

The Set Time Minutes feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. Time Format Show Time in Status Bar If Equipped Camera After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options ParkView Backup Camera Delay On 9 NOTE:

The ParkView Backup Camera Delay setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicles speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. Off

Off 24 hrs PM Off On

12 hrs AM On 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400 400 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Selectable Options Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off NOTE:

The Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Safety & Driving Assistance After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Selectable Options Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking NOTE:

Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it remains off when the vehicle is restarted. FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the Only Warning option is selected, a chime sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the Warning + Active Braking option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401 MULTIMEDIA 401 Setting Name Forward Collision Sensitivity If Equipped Near Selectable Options NOTE:

The Forward Collision Sensitivity setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. Far gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas Near gives you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. LaneSense Warning If Equipped Early NOTE:

The LaneSense Warning setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure. LaneSense Strength If Equipped ParkSense If Equipped Low Sound Sound & Display NOTE:

The ParkSense system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound or Sound & Display. Front ParkSense Volume If Equipped Rear ParkSense Volume Low Low 9 Far Late High High High Med Med Med Med Med 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402 402 MULTIMEDIA Rear ParkSense Braking Assist If Setting Name Equipped Selectable Options On Off NOTE:

When the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist feature is selected, the Park Assist system detects objects located behind the vehicle and utilizes auton-

omous braking to stop the vehicle. Power Steering Default Normal Sport Comfort NOTE:

When the Electric Power Steering Default is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to either Normal, Sport, or Comfort. Paddle Shifters If Equipped Blind Spot Alert If Equipped Enable Off Disable Lights Lights & Chime NOTE:

When the Blind Spot Alert feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is activated and shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as plays an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the BSM system is deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to specification. Hill Start Assist If Equipped On Off 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403 Mirror and Wipers After pressing the Mirror and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Setting Name Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse Auto Folding Side Mirrors If Equipped Rain Sensing Auto Wipers If Equipped Headlights with Wipers Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options On On On On 0 sec 60 sec 0 sec 60 sec On On NOTE:

When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. Headlight Illuminated On Approach Headlights With Wipers If Equipped Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped 9 NOTE:

When the Auto Dim High Beams feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. MULTIMEDIA 403 Off Off Off Off 30 sec 90 sec 30 sec 90 sec Off Off 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404 404 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Daytime Running Lights If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Daytime Running Lights feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase. Flash Lights With Lock Doors & Locks After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Setting Name Auto Door Locks Auto Unlock On Exit Flash Lights With Lock Sound Horn With Lock Sound Horn With Remote Start NOTE:

When the Auto Door Locks feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL (N) position, and the driver's door is opened. Off 1st Press 2nd Press Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405 Setting Name 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Selectable Options Driver Door All Doors NOTE:

When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door unlocks with the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors, all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed, only the drivers door unlocks when the drivers door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed, touching the handle more than once results in only the drivers door opening. If Driver Door is programmed, once the drivers door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). NOTE:

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. NOTE:

This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (drivers seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position, and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. Passive Entry If Equipped Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob If Equipped Power Lift Gate Alert If Equipped MULTIMEDIA 405 Off Off Off 9 On On On 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406 Seats & Comfort If Equipped After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options 406 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped Off Remote Start All Starts NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the drivers heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn On when temperatures are below 40F

(4.4C). When temperatures are above 80F (26.7C), the driver vented seat will turn on. Key Off Options After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Setting Name Easy Exit Seat Engine Off Power Delay Headlight Off Delay Auto Entry/Exit Suspension If Equipped On 0 sec 5 min 0 sec 60 sec On Off 45 sec 10 min 30 sec 90 sec Off 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407 MULTIMEDIA 407 Suspension If Equipped After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Auto Entry/Exit Suspension Selectable Options NOTE:

When the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to PARK for easy entry/exit. Display Suspension Messages Warning Only NOTE:

The Display Suspension Messages setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display all suspension messages, or to only display suspension warnings. NOTE:

When the Tire Jack Mode setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is on a jack, changing a tire. NOTE:

When the Transport Mode setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing. 9 NOTE:

The Wheel Alignment Mode setting prevents auto leveling of the Air Suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode Off Off Off Off On All On On On 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408 408 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Balance/Fade Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Selectable Options Speaker Icon NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box. Equalizer Bass Mid Treble NOTE:

When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting. Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3 Surround Sound If Equipped AUX Volume Offset If Equipped AutoPlay On

On NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Off

Off NOTE:

The AutoPlay setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is connected. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409 MULTIMEDIA 409 Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Setting Name Do Not Disturb Selectable Options Do Not Disturb Options NOTE:

The Do Not Disturb feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text, or both, to any incoming call, or text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road. Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources NOTE:

The Paired Phones and Audio Devices feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system. Refer to the Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement for further information. Smartphone Projection Manager SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Tune Start Selectable Options 9 NOTE:

The Tune Start feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play. On On Off Off Off 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410 410 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Channel Skip Selectable Options List of Channels NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. Subscription Information Sirius ID NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription. Accessibility If Equipped After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Video Button Readback Selectable Options On Off NOTE:

The Video Button Readback feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce Play Button Selected, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411 Reset After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Reset App Drawer to Default Restore Settings to Default NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. Clear Personal Data OK OK Yes Selectable Options Cancel Cancel Cancel NOTE:

When the Clear Personal Data feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. System Information If Equipped After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Software License Selectable Options System Software Information Screen NOTE:

When this feature is selected, a Software License screen will appear, displaying the system software license and version. MULTIMEDIA 411 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412 412 MULTIMEDIA SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION Safety Guidelines WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully before using the system. It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe and effective manner. Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen. Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage. Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a safe location and set the parking brake. Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the product. Return it to an authorized dealer for repair. Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System Read all instructions in this manual carefully before using your system to ensure proper usage. The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-

tronic device. Do not let young children use the system. Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music or the system at loud volumes. Exercise caution when setting the volume on the system. Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-

ture away from the system. Besides damage to the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic device. NOTE:

Many features of this system are speed depen-

dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413 Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. Care And Maintenance Touchscreen Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen surface!

Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions. UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY Introduction Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display MULTIMEDIA 413 NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-

ware for your vehicle. 1. Radio Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Mode. 2. Media 3. Climate Press the Media button on the touchscreen to access media sources such as USB De-

vice, AUX, and Bluetooth as long as the re-

quested media is present. Refer to Climate Controls in Getting To Know Your Vehicle for further details. Press the Apps button on the touchscreen to access Smartphone and Connected vehicle options. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 4. Apps 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414 414 MULTIMEDIA 5. Controls Press the Controls button on the touch-

screen to adjust the heated and vented seats or heated steering wheel

(if equipped). 6. Phone 7. Settings Press the Phone button on the touchscreen to access the Uconnect Phone feature. Press the Settings button on the touch-

screen to access the Uconnect Settings menu. Drag & Drop Menu Bar The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:

Radio Mode Radio Controls The radio is equipped with the following modes:

AM FM SiriusXM Satellite Radio If Equipped Press the Radio button on the touchscreen, bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons in the Radio mode. Volume/Power Control Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off the screen and mute the radio. Push the Volume/Power control knob a second time to turn the screen back on and unmute the radio. The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control knob clockwise increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it. Uconnect 4 Main Menu 1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen. 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut. NOTE:

This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415 Tune/Scroll Control When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station frequency. Push the Enter/Browse button to choose a selection. Screen Close The X button on the touchscreen at the top right, provides a means to close the Direct Tune Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds. Seek And Direct Tune Functions The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right and left of the radio station display or by pressing the left Steering Wheel Audio Control up or down. Seek Up Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel. During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began. Fast Seek Up Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released. Seek Down Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel. During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began. Fast Seek Down Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channel at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released. MULTIMEDIA 415 Direct Tune Press the Tune button on the touchscreen located at the bottom of the radio screen. The Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired station or channel. Press the available number button on the touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be reached) will become deactivated/grayed out. Undo You can backspace an entry by pressing the bottom left on the touchscreen. OK Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press the OK button, and the Direct Tune screen will close. The system will automatically tune to that station. The selected Station or Channel number is displayed in the Direct Tune text box. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416 416 MULTIMEDIA Setting Presets The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pressing any of the six Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top of the screen. When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep. The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at the top of the radio screen. You can switch between the two radio presets by pressing the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen. Browse In AM/FM When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button. Scrolling Preset List Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down arrow keys, located on the right of the screen. Preset Selection From List A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset and returns to the main radio screen. Deleting Presets A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding Preset. Return To Main Radio Screen You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by pressing the X button on the touchscreen when in the Browse Presets screen. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. SiriusXM is a subscription based service. SiriusXM All Access Package All satellite radio-equipped vehicles come with a one-year trial to the SiriusXM All Access package, providing over 160 channels of the best programming for all the places life takes you. In your vehicle Youll get every channel available on your radio, including all the premium programming like Howard Stern, every NFL game, every MLB game, every NASCAR race, Oprah Radio, and more. On the go With a SiriusXM Internet Radio subscription included with the All Access trial, youll get SiriusXM on your computer, smartphone, or tablet. Including:

A huge On Demand catalog Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM Latino a collection of Spanish-language channels MySXM allowing you to personalize your favorite music channels Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more information. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417 SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK. 2019 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky. If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to change the vehicles position in order to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in underground parking garages or tunnels. No Subscription Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver, require a subscription to the SiriusXM Service. When the Radio does not have the necessary subscription, the Radio is able to receive the Pre-View channel only. Acquiring SiriusXM Subscription To activate the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription, US residents call:

1-800-643-2112 Canadian residents call:

1-877-438-9677 NOTE:

You will need to provide the SiriusXM ID (RID) located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM button on the touchscreen. MULTIMEDIA 417 When in Satellite mode:

The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted. The SiriusXM Presets are displayed at the top of the screen. The Genre is displayed below the Presets Bar. in the center. The SiriusXM Channel Number is displayed The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of the Channel Number. The SiriusXM function buttons are displayed below the Program Information. Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune. In addition to the tuning Operation functions common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/Weather Jump, and fav button functions are available in SiriusXM Mode. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418 418 MULTIMEDIA Replay The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost. Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time. You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen, any time during the Replay mode. Play/Pause Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen. Rewind Press the RW button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released. Forward Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, can not be done for live content. A continuous press of the FW button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released. Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume playing of Live content. Favorites Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to activate the favorites menu, which will time out in five seconds in absence of user interaction. You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X in the top right corner. The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist, or song that is currently playing. The Radio then uses this information to alert you when either the favorite song, or favorite artist are being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM Channels. The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in the Radio is 50. Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on the touchscreen. Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on the touchscreen. Browse In SXM Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along with providing the SiriusXM Channel List. This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by pressing the Back Arrow. All Press the All button at the left of the Browse Screen. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419 Channel List Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all the SiriusXM Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Genre Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the selected Genre. Presets Press the Presets button located at the left of the Browse screen. You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up and down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. Preset Selection A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio screen. Deleting A Preset A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the corresponding Preset. Favorites Press the Favorites button located at the left of the Browse screen. The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Favorites list. You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. Remove Favorites Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted. MULTIMEDIA 419 Alert Settings Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM channels. Game Zone Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts. On Air Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio to that channel. Select Teams Press the Select Teams button on the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear, then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420 420 MULTIMEDIA Remove Selection Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the Selections or press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to be deleted. Alert Settings Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from Alert me to on-air games upon start or Alert upon score update or both when one or more of your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM channels. Featured Press the Featured button, located on the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides a list of your featured favorite stations. Audio Settings Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio main menu or within the Settings main menu, to activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound (if equipped), Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and Radio Off With Door. You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X located at the top right. Balance & Fade Equalizer Equalizer Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen. Press the + or buttons, or by pressing and dragging over the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands. Balance & Fade Press the Balance & Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421 Speed Adjusted Volume When Surround Sound is On, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system. MULTIMEDIA 421 Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this feature. When Loudness is On, the sound quality at lower volumes improves. AUX Volume Offset Surround Sound Loudness Speed Adjusted Volume Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increase to compensate for normal road noise. Surround Sound If Equipped Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate Surround Sound. Press Off to deactivate this feature. AUX Volume Offset Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing of the + and buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar. 9 Loudness 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422 422 MULTIMEDIA Auto Play Radio Off With Door If Equipped Media Mode Auto Play Radio Off With Door Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen to activate the Auto Play screen. The Auto Play feature has two settings On and Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play from a connected device, immediately after it is connect to the radio. Press the Radio Off With Door button on the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired. USB/iPod Mode Overview USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB device or iPod and cable into the USB Port or by pressing the Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then selecting USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped). Seek Up /Seek Down Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device/iPod. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection or to return to the beginning of the previous selection if the USB device/iPod is within the first three seconds of the current selection. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423 Browse Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to display the browse window. The left side of the browse window displays a list of ways you can browse through the contents of the USB device/iPod. If supported by the device, you can browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums, Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left side of the screen. The center of the browse window shows items and its sub-functions, which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can also be used to scroll. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB. Repeat Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off. Shuffle Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB/iPod device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off. Info Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the Info button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature. Tracks Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the line above and below the track name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up. MULTIMEDIA 423 Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings. AUX Mode Overview AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the display. Inserting Auxiliary Device Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert the device cable. Controlling The Auxiliary Device The control of the auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of the attached device. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424 424 MULTIMEDIA NOTE:

The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings. BLUETOOTH MODE Overview Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth device, containing music, to the Uconnect System. Before proceeding, the Bluetooth device must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect System. NOTE:

See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect Phone section for more details. To access Bluetooth mode, press the Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then select Bluetooth. Bluetooth Mode Seek Up

/Down button on the Press and release the Seek Up touchscreen for the next selection on the Bluetooth device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the Bluetooth device is within the first second of the current selection. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Bluetooth. Tracks If the Bluetooth device supports this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above and below the song title. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings. Android Auto & Apple CarPlay If Equipped Android Auto NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work. 3. Once the device is connected and NOTE:

To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android Auto may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen. MULTIMEDIA 425 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425 Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop or higher powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automatically brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they are needed. Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in-class speech technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio displays touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto, follow the following procedure:

1. Download the Android Auto app from the Google Play store on your Android-powered smartphone. 2. Connect your Android-powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android Auto app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your device in, the app will begin to download. recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &

drop menu bar changes to the Android Auto Icon. Android Auto should launch, but if it does not, refer to Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks in this section for the procedure to enable the feature AutoShow. You can also launch it by touching the Android Auto icon on the touchscreen. Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphones data plan:

Google Maps for navigation Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. Hands-free Calling and Texting for communi-

for music cation Hundred of compatible apps Signal Strength NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.fm Page 426 426 MULTIMEDIA Android Auto Maps Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto to access Google Maps. NOTE:

If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system. While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides voice-guided:

Navigation Live traffic information Lane guidance Android Auto Music Android Auto allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like Google Play Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphones data plan, you can stream endless music on the road. NOTE:

Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto for them to work with Android Auto. NOTE:

To see the track details for the music playing through Android Auto, select the Uconnect Systems media screen. For further information, refer to https://support.google.com/androidauto. Android Auto Maps For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ (US Residents) https:/

/www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto (Canadian Residents). For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https://

support.google.com/android or https://

support.google.com/androidauto/. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427 Communication Apple CarPlay With Android Auto connected, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition specific to the Android Auto. This allows you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls. Android Auto Apps The Android Auto App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto. NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages, and more. To use Apple CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. MULTIMEDIA 427 NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as after-

market cables may not work. 2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &

drop menu bar changes to the Apple CarPlay Icon. Apple CarPlay should launch, but if not, refer to Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks in this section for the procedure to enable the feature AutoShow. You can also touch the Apple CarPlay icon on the touchscreen to launch it. 9 Apple CarPlay 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428 Apple CarPlay Phone Apple CarPlay Messages 428 MULTIMEDIA Once Apple CarPlay is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your iPhones data plan:

Phone Music Messages Maps NOTE:

To use Apple CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply. With Apple CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to voice mail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone. NOTE:

Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel launches a built-in VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay. Apple CarPlay Music Apple CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your iPhones data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news, sports, podcasts and more. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. Apple CarPlay allows you to use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able to read messages, as everything is done via voice. Apple CarPlay Maps Push and hold the VR button until the beep on the steering wheel or tap the Microphone icon to ask Apple to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay to access Apple Maps. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429 Apple CarPlay Apps To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay, you must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app. Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/

ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay. Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks AutoPlay AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system that automatically begins playing music off of the connected device, as soon as it is connected. This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio Settings category. Its default setting is on. NOTE:

AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto. Android Auto Automatic Bluetooth Pairing After connecting to Android Auto for the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the smartphone will automatically pair to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth without any setup required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth is turned on. NOTE:

Android Auto features cannot be used with Bluetooth, a USB connection is required for its use. Android Auto uses both Bluetooth and USB connections to function, and the connected device will be unavailable to other devices when connected using Android Auto. Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto/Apple CarPlay, the connected device will be the one that will be used to place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text messages. MULTIMEDIA 429 However, another device can also be paired to the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth, as an audio source, so the passenger can stream music. NOTE:

If using a Samsung device, every time it is connected to a media USB, and there is another device plugged in, you will need to manually change the configuration of the USB connection in order for the Samsung device to send data. The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will be unavailable when Android Auto/Apple CarPlay are in use. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430 430 MULTIMEDIA Phone Mode Overview Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 Favorite Contacts 2 Mobile Phone Battery Life 3 Currently Paired Mobile Phone 4 Siri 5 Mute Microphone 6 Transfer To/From Uconnect System 7 Conference Call*

8 Phone Settings 9 Text Messaging**

10 Direct Dial Pad 11 Recent Call Log 12 Browse Phone Book Entries 13 End Call 14 Call/Redial/Hold 15 Do Not Disturb 16 Reply With Text Message

* Conference Call feature only available on Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices

** Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones [requires Bluetooth Message Ac-

cess Profile (MAP) profile]

Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone. Uconnect Phone supports the following features:

Voice Activated Features:

Hands-Free dialing via Voice (Call John Smith Mobile or, Dial 248-555-1212). Hands-Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages. Hands-Free text message reply. (Forward one of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to incoming calls/text messages). logs. Redialing last dialed numbers (Redial). Calling back the last incoming call number

(Call Back). View call logs on screen (Show Incoming Calls, Show Outgoing Calls, Show Missed Calls, Show Recent Calls). Searching contacts phone number (Search for John Smith Mobile). NOTE:

Examples of Voice Commands are provided throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the Voice Command Quick Reference Section. Screen Activated Features Dialing via keypad using touchscreen. Viewing and calling contacts from phone-

books displayed on the touchscreen. Setting favorite contact phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the main phone screen. Viewing and calling contacts from recent call Reviewing your recent incoming SMS. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431 Listen to music on your Bluetooth device via the touchscreen. Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly. NOTE:

Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly. Your mobile phones audio is transmitted through your vehicles audio system; the system automatically mutes your radio when using the Uconnect Phone. For Uconnect customer support:

US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call: 877-855-8400 Canadian residents - (English) call:

800-465-2001 or (French) call:

800-387-9983 Visit UconnectPhone.com Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation. WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile mobile phone. Uconnect features Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time. MULTIMEDIA 431 Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel is used to get into the phone mode and make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc. Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command button on your steering wheel is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send tones or make another call. The button on your steering wheel is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the button. The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432 432 MULTIMEDIA Phone Operation Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Command works:

1. Say compound commands like Call John Smith mobile. 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt. For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile, the following compound command can be said: Call John Smith mobile. For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound command form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith, or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands:

Search Contact and when asked John Smith. Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you. Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out certain non-word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh. The system handles fill-in words such as I would like to. The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow-up prompt such as Who do you want to call? in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized. The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pushing the Voice Command button on your steering wheel. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say Help following the beep. To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a command or say help. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if active) on the radio control head. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433 Cancel Command 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN MULTIMEDIA 433 position. 2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on the touchscreen. NOTE:

If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone. 3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. 4. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. Press the Settings button on your mobile phone. Select Bluetooth and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections. At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu. You can also push the VR button or Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu. Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system. To complete the pairing process, you need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information. NOTE:

You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure. The vehicle must be in PARK. Pairing A Phone If No is selected, and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Set-

tings button from the Uconnect Phone main screen. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select Uconnect and accept the connection request. 9 5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting. 6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select Uconnect. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434 434 MULTIMEDIA 7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect Phone. NOTE:

Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN. 8. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If No is selected, simply select Uconnect from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device. NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-

tooth connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phones Bluetooth settings. Pair Additional Mobile Phones 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen from the Phone main screen. 2. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen. 3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen. 4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting. 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range. NOTE:

For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher priority. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:

Show Paired Phones or Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device 7. When the pairing process has successfully 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435 1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin. 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth. 3. Press the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen to display the Paired Audio Devices screen. 4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen. NOTE:

If there is no device currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear. 5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth-enabled audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect screen. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting. completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range. NOTE:

For devices which are not made a favorite, the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired will have the higher priority. You can also use a following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices:

Show Paired Phones or Connect My Phone Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps:

MULTIMEDIA 435 touchscreen. 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Sources button on the touchscreen. 3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will appear, press Connect Phone. 4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen. Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen. 3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name. 4. The options pop-up will be displayed. 9 5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the touchscreen. screen. 6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436 436 MULTIMEDIA Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device 4. The options pop-up will be displayed. Automatic download and update of a phone 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the 5. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio touchscreen; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list. Devices button on the touchscreen. 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings 3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device. 4. The options pop-up will be displayed. 5. Press the Delete Device button on the touchscreen. screen. 6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen. 3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name. screen. Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone) If Equipped If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from the mobile phones phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones. To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book, follow the procedure in the Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips section. book, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle. A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone. Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-

ously downloaded phonebook is available for use. Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible. This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437 Managing Your Favorites 3. Press Remove from Favs. Dial By Saying A Number There are two ways you can add an entry to your Favorites. 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that appears on the list. 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Contacts from the Phone main screen, and then select the appropriate number. Press the down arrow symbol button next to the selected number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to Favorites. NOTE:

If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an existing favorite. To Remove A Favorite Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have. Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone. Redial Dial by pressing in the number Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back) 1. To remove a Favorite, select Favorites from the Phone main screen. Favorites 2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the contact you want to remove from your favorites. This will bring up the options for that favorite contact. Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log SMS Message Viewer MULTIMEDIA 437 1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin. 2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep, say Dial 151-123-4444. 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 151-123-4444. Call By Saying A Phonebook Name 1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin. 2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep, say Call John Doe Mobile. 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe. Call Controls 9 The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features:

Answer End Ignore 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438 438 MULTIMEDIA Hold/unhold Mute/unmute Transfer the call to/from the phone Swap two active calls Join two active calls together Touch-Tone Number Entry 1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen. 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. 4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter the number and press Call. If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone End) press the VR button to send a touch-tone and say Send 1234# or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook. Recent Calls You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the following call types:

All Calls Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls These can be accessed by pressing the recent calls button on the Phone main screen. You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the incoming calls will be displayed. NOTE:

Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing, Recent, or Missed. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel to accept the call. You can also press the Answer button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel, answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE:

The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Do Not Disturb With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439 Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. Automatic reply messages can be:

I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly. Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. NOTE:

Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls. NOTE:

with iPhones. Reply with text message is not compatible Join Calls Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth MAP. Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call, press the Hold button on the Phone main screen. Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section. To combine two calls, refer to Join Calls in this section. Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the active and held phone call. When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. MULTIMEDIA 439 Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone End button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. Redial Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or push the VR button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep, say Redial. The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone. Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF. NOTE:

The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection. It is recom-

mended to press the Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440 440 MULTIMEDIA Browsing SMS Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function through Bluetooth. Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu, and then select SMS Reader using the arrow keys on the steering wheel controls. The SMS Reader submenu allows the last 10 SMS messages to be displayed. Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen. Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User's Manual. Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For the best performance:

Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least

-inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. Always wait for the beep before speaking. Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/

meters away from you. Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period. Performance is maximized under:

Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Condition WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents, the system may not always work for some. Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. of the vehicle (if equipped), and the active Selec-Terrain mode. To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the touchscreen, and then select Off-Road Pages. MULTIMEDIA 441 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441 NOTE:

It is recommended that you do not store names in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion. Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero). Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported. Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under:

Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions Operation From The Driver's Seat Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode. Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system. OFF-ROAD PAGES IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, which provides the vehicle status while operating on off-road conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll Main Menu 1 Off-Road Pages App 2 Uconnect Apps Button 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442 442 MULTIMEDIA Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:

Vehicle Dynamics Suspension Pitch & Roll If Equipped Accessory Gauge Selec-Terrain If Equipped Off-Road Pages Status Bar Vehicle Dynamics The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information concerning the vehicles drivetrain. The following information is displayed:

Steering angle in degrees Status of Transfer Case Status of the Rear Axles If Equipped The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the five selectable page options. It provides continually updating information for the following items:

Current Transfer Case Status (only appears when in 4WD LOW) Current Selec-Terrain mode If Equipped Status Bar 1 Transfer Case Status (Only When In 4WD LOW) 2 Selec-Terrain Mode If Equipped 3 Current Latitude/Longitude 4 Current Altitude 5 Hill Descent 6 Selec-Speed Status And Set Speed Current Latitude/Longitude Current Altitude of the vehicle Status of Hill Descent Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in mph (km/h) Vehicle Dynamics Menu 1 Steering Angle 2 Transfer Case Status 3 Rear Axle Locker Status MULTIMEDIA 443 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443 Suspension The Suspension page displays information concerning the vehicles suspension. The following information is displayed:

Suspension Articulation Indicator Current Ride Height Status If Equipped Normal Off-Road 1 Off-Road 2 Entry/Exit Aero Suspension Menu Pitch & Roll Menu 1 Suspension Articulation Indicator 2 Current Ride Height 1 Current Pitch 2 Current Roll NOTE:

The wheel articulation will be represented by a yellow color in the Suspension Articulation Indi-

cator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen will switch to the appro-

priate height and the Suspension Articulation Indicator will show the movement and change in height. Pitch & Roll The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicles current pitch (angle up and down) and roll

(angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide a visualization of the current vehicle angle. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444 444 MULTIMEDIA Accessory Gauges The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of the vehicles Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure

(Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage. Accessory Gauges Menu 1 Coolant Temperature 2 Oil Temperature 3 Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only) 4 Battery Voltage 5 Transmission Temperature Selec-Terrain If Equipped The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will alter the image on the screen. The vehicle must be in the ON/RUN position to display Selec-Terrain information. The selectable modes are as follows:

Snow Sand Mud Auto Default Rock Vehicle Must Be In 4WD LOW NOTE:

While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the current Selec-Terrain mode. Current Selec-Terrain Mode 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode:

Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the next listenable station, and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button. Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/

Bluetooth). Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Media Mode Wheel) The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume. Pushing the center button makes the radio switch between the various modes available

(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.) MULTIMEDIA 445 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port. Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port may activate Android Auto or Apple CarPlay features, if equipped. For further information, refer to Android Auto or Apple CarPlay in the Owners Manual Supplement. iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, iPod nano, 5G iPod, and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit Apples website for software updates. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement. Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port which is located in the center console. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446 446 MULTIMEDIA The USB ports on the media hub are equipped with a Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator

(Smart Charge) feature. This feature allows a device to charge for up to one hour after the vehicle is powered off. Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB 1 USB Port One 2 AUX Port 3 USB Port Two Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicles iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use. NOTE:

If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. Using This Feature By using an iPod cable or an external USB device to connect to the USB port:

The audio device can be played on the vehicles sound system, providing metadata

(artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display. The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents. The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio device). NOTE:

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement. Second Row USB Charging Port Second row USB connector ports can be used for charging purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicles USB charging ports which are located on the rear of the front center console. Front Center Console Rear USB Ports 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447 Place the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-

With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel MULTIMEDIA 447 1 (Rear 1) on the remote control and head-

phones, refers to Screen 1 (driver's side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the remote control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger side). UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT

(RSE) SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System is designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of standard video games or audio devices. Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar with its features and operation. Getting Started Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats:

Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on the cover. tion. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray disc player. If equipped with a Blu-ray disc player, the icon will be present on the player. Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment System by pushing the power button on the remote control. When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-ray disc is inserted into the disc player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on, and playback begins. RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors 9 RSE System Screen RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1) 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448 448 MULTIMEDIA Blu-ray Disc Player Play A Blu-ray Disc The Blu-ray disc player is located in the center console. RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors The system can be controlled either by the front seat occupants utilizing the touch-

screen radio or by the rear seat occupants using the remote control. Dual Video Screen Blu-ray Disc Player Location NOTE:

Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System:

1. The Remote Control The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped) Insert a Blu-ray disc into the Video Entertainment System disc player with the label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen, the language screen, or starts playing the first track. 2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver's side rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 1. 3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side rear passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Rear 2. NOTE:

To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then press the Disc button. Press the Play button, and then the Full Screen button. Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK (P) position for vehicles with automatic transmission. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449 Using The Touchscreen Radio 4. RSE Remote Control Lock-Out 8. RSE Mode MULTIMEDIA 449 Press to enable/disable remote control functions. 5. RSE Channel 2 Mode Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is not highlighted, select the button to access controls for Screen 2/Channel 2 source. 6. Cabin Audio Mode Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear entertainment source currently shown on the rear media control screen. 7. Radio Full Screen Mode Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode. Select this button to change the source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Chan-

nel on the rear media control screen. Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then press the rear media button on the touchscreen. Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin playing the Blu-ray disc on the touch-

screen radio. Using The Remote Control Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for drivers side rear screen and Rear 2 for passengers side rear screen), and then press the source key. Using the up and down arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK button. Press the pop-up/menu key to navigate the disc menu and options. 9 Rear Media Control Screen 1. RSE Channel 1 Mode Indicates the current source for Screen 1/

Channel 1. This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is not highlighted, select the button to access controls for Screen 1/Channel 1 source. 2. RSE Power Press to turn RSE On/Off. 3. RSE Mute Mute rear headphones for the current igni-

tion cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450 450 MULTIMEDIA Play Video Games Connect the video game console to the Audio/

Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat. Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera, connect video games for display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 player. Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI input, be sure to follow the standard color coding for the audio/video jacks:

1. Right audio in (red) 2. Left audio in (white) 3. Video in (yellow) 4. HDMI Input NOTE:

Certain high-end video games consoles may exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter. Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio 1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track. 2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1

(drivers side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1. 3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2

(passengers side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2. Using The Remote Control 1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control. 2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push ENTER/OK. Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451 Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls 3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen 1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect system touchscreen. 2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media Control screen. and then the select source button on the touchscreen. Press the Disc button on the touchscreen in the Media column. To exit, press the X at the top right of the screen. Rear Media Control Screen Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen MULTIMEDIA 451 NOTE:

Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or Blu-ray Disc is playing brings up the basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions. Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously. The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs, and Blu-ray Discs. Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1. Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2. 9 Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the screen(s) are closed. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452 452 MULTIMEDIA Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control If Equipped screen. 3. SOURCE Push to enter Source Selection 10. POPUP/MENU Push to bring up repeat 4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control. When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (right screen). 5. Push to navigate menus. 6. SETUP Push to access the screen settings menu. 7. Push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter. 8. / (Play/Pause) Begin/resume or pause disc play. and shuffle options, the Blu-ray Disc pop-up menu, the DVD title menu, or to access disc menus. 11. Keypad Push to navigate chapters or titles. 12.

(Stop) Stops disc play. 13. Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. 14. Mutes headphone audio. 15. BACK Push to exit out of menus or return to source selection screen. 16. Push to navigate menus. 17. Push to navigate menus. 18. OK Push to select the highlighted option in a menu. 9. Four Colored Buttons Push to access Blu-ray Disc features. 19. Push to navigate menus. Blu-ray Player Remote Control Controls And Indicators 1. Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on. 2. Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pushed, the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453 Headphones Operation Controls The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen. If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control, verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not muted, and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones. Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones 1 Power Button 2 Volume Control 3 Channel Selection Switch The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup. NOTE:

The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-

matically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off. Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones 1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/

screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch. NOTE:

When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the head-

phones are tuned to the audio on Channel 1. MULTIMEDIA 453 When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the remote is controlling Channel 2 and the head-

phones are tuned to the audio on Channel 2. 2. Push the Source button on the remote control. the next mode. 3. Pushing the Source button will advance to 4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the Ok button to select the new mode. 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the Back button on the remote control. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454 454 MULTIMEDIA Replacing The Headphone Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward. 2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown. 3. Replace the battery compartment cover. Accessibility If Equipped Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray system that announces a function prior to performing the action. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Multimedia for further information. Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or

"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (Aptiv) wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not transferable. How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product. What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials. What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse, abuse, or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal use, are specifically not covered

(replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES

(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. If you have any questions or comments regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones, please email hpservice@aptiv.com or phone:

888-293-3332. System Information Disc Menu When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing the remote controls Pop-Up/Menu button displays a list of all commands which control playback of the disc. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455 Display Settings currently selected item. To reset all values back to the original settings, select the Default Settings menu option and push the remote controls ENTER/OK button. Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player's settings of DVD being watched in the remote player. Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only the audio portion of the channel with the screen closed:

Set the audio to the desired source and channel. Video Screen Display Settings Close the video screen. When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, AUX Video, etc.), pushing the remote controls SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances. To change the settings, push the remote controls Navigation buttons (, ) to select an item, then push the remote controls Navigation buttons (, ) to change the value for the To change the current audio mode, push the remote controls Source button. This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode/Source Select menu. When the screen is reopened, the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media. If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify that the headphones are turned on

(the On indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the desired MULTIMEDIA 455 channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the remote controls power button to turn audio on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones. Disc Formats The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing the following types of 4.7-inch (12-centimeter) diameter discs:

BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1) DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD, DVD-VR CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 6) profile 3.0 DVD Region Codes The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the player, the disc will not play. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456 456 MULTIMEDIA DVD Audio Support When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level, remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode. Recorded Discs The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported. If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players. To help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs:

Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed are playable. For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique. For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported. The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc. Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc. If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs. The recommended method for labeling recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the DVD player. Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA) The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW). The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always end with the extension

".mp3" or ".MP3" and WMA files must always end with the extension ".wma" or ".WMA". To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any other types of files. For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data

(such as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported. Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play. The Blu-ray player will auto-

matically skip the file and begin playing the next available file. Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next avail-

able file. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457 If you are creating your own files, the recom-

mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192 Kbps and the recom-

mended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates are also supported. For both formats, the recommended sample rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicles interior temperature is above 120F

(48.9C). When this occurs, the player will display "High Temp" and will shut off the rear seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray Disc player. To change the current file, use the remote controls or Blu-ray Disc players ? button to advance to the next file, or the ? button to return to the start of the current or previous file. Disc Errors If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a "Disc Error" message. If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track. Product Agreement This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by US patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless", and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. MULTIMEDIA 457 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped). Regulatory And Safety Information USA/CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458 458 MULTIMEDIA The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

NOTE:

1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reason-

able protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guar-

antee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-

ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-

aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

a. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-

rienced radio technician for help. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 4 or Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps menu, of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display system. Uconnect 4 MULTIMEDIA 459 Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:

Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The micro-

phones are positioned in the headliner and aimed at the driver. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the Voice Recognition

(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460 460 MULTIMEDIA You can interrupt the help message or Basic Voice Commands system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from the current category. The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button

. After the beep, say:

Cancel to stop a current voice session Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Media Commands again Repeat to listen to the system prompts Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR systems status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

. After the beep, say:

Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP:

At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button you with a list of commands. and say Help. The system provides Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth, and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. After the beep, say one Push the VR button of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. Change source to Bluetooth Change source to AUX Change source to USB Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Uconnect Voice Command Buttons 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send, Or Receive A Text 2 For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV Sys-

tem Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function 3 Push To End Call 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461 TIP:

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre information is displayed. Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. Push the Phone button one of the following commands:

Call John Smith

. After the beep, say Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts number) number) Redial (call previous outgoing phone Call back (call previous incoming phone TIP:

When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say Call John Smith work. and say Call, then Voice Text Reply If Equipped Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR button enabled) and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) or Phone button

(if 1. Once an incoming text message is read to or Phone button

(if enabled). After the beep, say: Reply. you, push the VR button 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the predefined messages and follow the system prompts. MULTIMEDIA 461 PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY Yes. No. Okay. Call me. RESPONSES Stuck in traffic. Start without me. Where are you?

Are you there yet?

Ill call you later. I need directions. Im on my way. Im lost. Cant talk right now. See you later. Ill be late. I will be 5 <or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60> minutes late. See you in 5

<or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60>

minutes. Thanks. NOTE:

Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the system does not transpose the message. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462 462 MULTIMEDIA TIP:

Your mobile phone must have the full imple-

mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. For further information on how to enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, refer to your iPhones User Manual. TIP:

Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message. Climate Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) Push the VR button of the following commands:

Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees

. After the beep, say one Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees TIP:

Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. Navigation (4C NAV) If Equipped The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button

. After the beep, say: Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan. 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP:

To start a POI search, push the VR button After the beep, say: Find nearest coffee shop. Siri Eyes Free If Equipped Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages, and many other useful requests. Do Not Disturb With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463 Automatic reply messages can be:

I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly. Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. NOTE:

Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls. NOTE:

Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones. Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth MAP. Android Auto If Equipped NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Androids best-in-class speech technology through your vehicles voice recognition system, and use your smartphones data plan to project your Android-powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. MULTIMEDIA 463 Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto, to activate Androids VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphones features:

Maps Music Phone Text Messages Additional Apps Refer to your Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement for further information. NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464 464 MULTIMEDIA Apple CarPlay If Equipped NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicles voice recognition system, and use your smartphone to project your iPhone and many apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen (smartphones data plan will be used for certain apps). Connect your iPhone 5 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the Apple factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay icon that replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use certain iPhones features such as:

Phone Music Messages Maps (if equipped) Additional Apps (if equipped) Refer to your Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement for further information. NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 1. 2. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et Additional Information l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-

mettre le fonctionnement. La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Uconnect System Support:

US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week) 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-

nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French) MULTIMEDIA 465 SiriusXM Guardian services support:

US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/

guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/

guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091 9 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466 466 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufac-

turer's customer center. Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

Owner's name and address Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office) Authorized dealer name Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Vehicle delivery date and mileage 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467 FCA US LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (877) 426-5337 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /

(800) 387-9983 French In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 800-505-1300 Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands FCA Caribbean LLC P.O. Box 191857 San Juan 00919-1857 Phone: (877) 426-5337 Fax: (787) 782-3345 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 467 weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922

(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. Authorized dealers have also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. 10 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468 468 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to http://

www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP. 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/

troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 469 Owner's Manuals These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (US) 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com (US) 10 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470 470 A About Your Brakes.........................................367 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control)..............................................214 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............342 Adding Fuel....................................................255 Additives, Fuel ...............................................369 Adjust Forward ....................................................... 37 Rearward..................................................... 37 Air Bag Air Bag Operation ......................................155 Air Bag Warning Light ................................152 Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................155 Enhanced Accident Response......... 159, 312 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................312 Front Air Bag .............................................154 If Deployment Occurs................................159 Knee Impact Bolsters................................155 Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............160 Maintenance .............................................160 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............153 Side Air Bags .............................................156 Transporting Pets......................................177 Air Bag Light ........................................ 152, 178 INDEX Air Cleaner, Engine

(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 330 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 333 Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 333 Air Conditioner System ................................. 333 Air Conditioning................................................64 Air Conditioning Filter........... 66, 331, 332, 334 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................65 Air Filter ........................................................ 330 Air Pressure Tires ......................................................... 353 Alarm Arm The System ................................... 25, 26 Disarm The System .....................................25 Rearm The System ......................................26 Security Alarm ....................................25, 110 Alterations/Modifications Vehicle.........................................................12 Ambient Light...................................................54 Android Auto ................................................. 463 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........342, 372, 373 Disposal ................................................... 343 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 120 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 110 Apple CarPlay................................................ 464 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 127 Audio Settings............................................... 420 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 379 Auto Down Power Windows..............................67 Auto Up Power Windows ..................................68 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................46 Automatic Door Locks ......................................31 Automatic Headlights.......................................51 Automatic High Beams.....................................51 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............65 Automatic Transmission....................... 181, 190 Adding Fluid.............................................. 346 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 346 Fluid Change............................................. 346 Fluid Level Check............................. 345, 346 Fluid Type ...............................345, 376, 378 Gear Ranges............................................. 191 Special Additives ...................................... 345 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 194 Aux Mode ...................................................... 423 Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 131 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........86 Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................86 Axle Fluid.............................................. 376, 378 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471 B Battery................................................. 108, 327 Charging System Light...............................108 Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 15 Battery Saver Feature...................................... 52 Belts, Seat .....................................................178 Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................131 Bluetooth Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone........................................................440 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .........435 Bluetooth Mode.............................................424 Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................336 B-Pillar Location.............................................351 Brake Assist System ......................................121 Brake Control System, Electronic ..................121 Brake Fluid ................................. 344, 376, 378 Brake System ...................................... 344, 367 Anti-Lock (ABS)..........................................367 Fluid Check ...............................................344 Master Cylinder .........................................344 Parking......................................................186 Warning Light ............................................107 Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................189 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ......................................... 185, 186 Bulb Replacement ........................................ 284 Bulbs, Light................................................... 180 C Camera, Rear................................................ 253 Capacities, Fluid .................................. 372, 373 Caps, Filler Oil (Engine) ...................................... 323, 330 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 343 Car Washes................................................... 364 Carbon Monoxide Warning................... 178, 371 Cargo Area Cover ...................................... 77, 78 Cargo Compartment ........................................77 Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................78 Cellular Phone .............................................. 457 Certification Label......................................... 256 Chains, Tire.......................................... 360, 361 Changing A Flat Tire............................. 296, 347 Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 348 Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light)......................... 119 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 177 Checks, Safety .............................................. 177 Child Restraint .............................................. 162 471 Child Restraints Booster Seats ........................................... 165 Child Seat Installation............................... 175 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt..... 172 Infant And Child Restraints....................... 164 LATCH Positions........................................ 167 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 167 Older Children And Child Restraints.......... 164 Seating Positions ...................................... 166 Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 369 Cleaning Wheels...................................................... 359 Climate Control ................................................58 Automatic ....................................................58 Cold Weather Operation................................ 185 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 357 Console Storage ........................................................85 Console, Overhead...........................................85 Contract, Service........................................... 467 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 343 11 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472 472 Cooling System..............................................341 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).......................342 Coolant Level ............................................343 Cooling Capacity.............................. 372, 373 Disposal Of Used Coolant..........................343 Drain, Flush, And Refill..............................341 Inspection ....................................... 341, 343 Points To Remember.................................344 Pressure Cap.............................................343 Radiator Cap .............................................343 Selection Of Coolant

(Antifreeze)...........342, 372, 373, 374, 377 Corrosion Protection......................................363 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............ 211, 214 Cruise Light ......................................... 115, 117 Cupholders ...................................................... 86 Customer Assistance .....................................466 Cybersecurity.................................................379 D Daytime Running Lights................................... 50 Dealer Service ...............................................328 Defroster, Windshield ....................................178 Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................118 Dimmer Control Switch.................................... 54 Dipsticks Oil (Engine)................................................327 Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................309 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 343 Disturb .......................................................... 438 Do Not Disturb .............................................. 462 Door Ajar.............................................. 108, 109 Door Ajar Light ..................................... 108, 109 Door Locks Automatic ....................................................31 Drivers Seat Back Tilt......................................34 Driving .......................................................... 273 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System).... 447 E Economy (Fuel) Mode ................................... 189 Electric Brake Control System....................... 121 Anti-Lock Brake System............................ 120 Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 122, 129 Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................47 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........86 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)..... 212 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 123 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 109 Emergency Gas Can Refueling...................... 305 Emergency, In Case Of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck..................... 308 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 279 Jacking ............................................ 296, 347 Jump Starting ........................................... 302 Tow Hooks................................................ 312 Emission Control System Maintenance......... 119 Engine........................................................... 323 Air Cleaner ................................................ 330 Block Heater............................................. 185 Break-In Recommendations ............ 185, 186 Checking Oil Level .................................... 327 Compartment ............... 323, 324, 325, 326 Compartment Identification................. 323, 324, 325, 326 Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................... 374, 377 Cooling...................................................... 341 Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 178, 371 Fails To Start............................................. 184 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 184 Fuel Requirements ................................... 368 Jump Starting ........................................... 302 Oil ........................ 328, 372, 373, 374, 377 Oil Filler Cap .................................... 323, 330 Oil Filter .................................................... 330 Oil Reset ......................................................97 Oil Selection............................329, 372, 373 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 330 Overheating .............................................. 306 Starting............................................ 181, 182 Engine Oil Viscosity .............................. 329, 330 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart..................... 329, 330 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ................................................ 159, 312 Ethanol ..........................................................370 Exhaust Gas Cautions.......................... 178, 371 Exhaust System ................................... 178, 340 Exterior Lights.........................................49, 180 F Filters Air Cleaner.................................................330 Air Conditioning ............... 66, 331, 332, 334 Engine Oil ............................... 330, 374, 377 Engine Oil Disposal ...................................330 Flashers.........................................................279 Hazard Warning.........................................279 Turn Signals ........................... 116, 180, 288 Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 51 Flooded Engine Starting ................................184 Fluid Capacities ................................... 372, 373 Fluid Leaks ....................................................180 Fluid Level Checks Brake ........................................................344 Fluid, Brake ......................................... 376, 378 Fluids And Lubricants .......................... 374, 377 Fog Lights ........................................................ 52 Fold-Flat Seats................................................. 34 Forward Collision Warning .............................136 Four Wheel Drive ................................. 196, 205 Operation ................................................. 196 System ..................................................... 196 Four Wheel Drive Operation.......................... 196 Four-Way Hazard Flasher.............................. 279 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 308 Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 346 Fuel............................................................... 368 Adding ...................................................... 255 Additives................................................... 369 Clean Air ................................................... 369 Economy Mode......................................... 189 Ethanol..................................................... 370 Gasoline ................................................... 368 Light ......................................................... 111 Materials Added ....................................... 369 Methanol .................................................. 370 Octane Rating................368, 369, 374, 377 Requirements........................................... 368 Tank Capacity.................................. 372, 373 Fueling.......................................................... 255 Fuses ............................................................ 290 473 G Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................79 Gasoline, (Fuel)............................................. 368 Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 369 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 369 Gear Ranges ................................................. 191 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 366 Glove Compartment Storage............................84 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 258 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 258 GVWR............................................................ 256 H Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 279 Head Restraints ...............................................41 Head Rests ......................................................41 Headlight Washers...........................................57 Headlights Cleaning.................................................... 364 Delay ...........................................................52 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........50 Lights On Reminder .....................................52 On With Wipers ............................................51 Passing ........................................................51 Switch..........................................................49 Washers.......................................................57 11 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474 474 Heated Mirrors ................................................ 48 Heated Seats................................................... 39 Heated Steering Wheel............................. 44, 45 Heater, Engine Block .....................................185 Hill Descent Control.......................................125 Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................125 Hill Start Assist ..............................................127 Hitches Trailer Towing............................................260 Hood Closing ........................................................ 74 Opening....................................................... 73 Hood Prop........................................................ 73 Hood Release .................................................. 73 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................... 366 Interior Appearance Care.............................. 365 Interior Lights...................................................53 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................55 Inverter Power ..........................................................88 iPod Control .................................................. 445 iPod/USB/MP3 Control........................ 422, 445 Bluetooth Streaming Audio....................... 445 J Jack Location................................................ 296 Jack Operation............................ 296, 297, 347 Jacking Instructions ...................................... 297 Jump Starting ............................................... 302 I Ignition ............................................................ 17 Switch ......................................................... 17 K Key Fob In Vehicle Help Vehicle User Guide ...................................... 13 Inside Rearview Mirror............................46, 279 Instrument Cluster........................................... 94 Descriptions ..............................................116 Display ........................................................ 95 Engine Oil Reset.......................................... 97 Menu Items................................................. 99 Arm The System ..........................................25 Disarm The System .....................................25 Programming Additional Key Fobs........16, 23 Key Fob Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry)....................................15 Key Fob Programming

(Remote Keyless Entry)....................................16 Key-In Reminder ..............................................19 Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................27 Passive Entry ...............................................27 Keys .................................................................14 Replacement ........................................16, 23 L Lane Change Assist..........................................52 LaneSense .................................................... 250 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 145 Latches ......................................................... 180 Hood ............................................................73 Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 368 Leaks, Fluid................................................... 180 Life Of Tires................................................... 355 Liftgate.............................................................74 Closing.........................................................75 Opening .......................................................74 Power...........................................................75 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................57 Light Bulbs .................................................... 180 Lights ............................................................ 180 Air Bag ............................................. 152, 178 Ambient .......................................................54 Automatic Headlights ..................................51 Brake Assist Warning................................ 125 Brake Warning.......................................... 107 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475 Bulb Replacement.....................................284 Courtesy/Reading ....................................... 53 Cruise.............................................. 115, 117 Daytime Running......................................... 50 Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................... 54 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator....................................................109 Exterior...............................................49, 180 Fog .............................................................. 52 Hazard Warning Flasher............................279 Headlights On With Wipers.......................... 51 High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 50 Hill Descent Control Indicator....................125 Interior ........................................................ 53 Lights On Reminder..................................... 52 Low Fuel....................................................111 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......111 Map............................................................. 53 Park....................................................51, 115 Passing........................................................ 51 Reading....................................................... 53 Seat Belt Reminder ...................................110 Security Alarm ...........................................110 Service ......................................................284 Side Marker...............................................288 Traction Control.........................................125 Turn Signals .................... 52, 116, 180, 288 Vanity Mirror ................................................49 Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions .................................... 109, 116 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................... 105 Load Shed Battery Saver On......................... 105 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 105 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor............ 105 Loading Vehicle ............................................ 256 Tires ......................................................... 351 Locks Automatic Door............................................31 Child Protection ...........................................31 Power Door..................................................27 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 336 Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 367 Luggage Carrier ...............................................89 M Maintenance............................................. 70, 73 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 327 Maintenance Schedule........................ 313, 317 Malfunction Indicator Light

(Check Engine)..................................... 111, 119 Manual Service ..................................................... 469 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ....................32 Memory Seat ...................................................32 475 Memory Settings ..............................................32 Methanol....................................................... 370 Mirrors .............................................................46 Automatic Dimming .....................................46 Electric Remote ...........................................47 Exterior Folding............................................47 Heated.........................................................48 Outside ........................................................47 Rearview............................................ 46, 279 Vanity...........................................................49 Modifications/Alterations Vehicle.........................................................12 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 138 Mopar Parts .................................................. 468 Multi-Function Control Lever ............................50 N New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 185 O Occupant Restraints ..................................... 142 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)............. 368, 369 Oil Filter, Change........................................... 330 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 330 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 109 Oil Reset ..........................................................97 11 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476 476 Oil, Engine .................................. 328, 374, 377 Capacity .......................................... 372, 373 Change Interval ............................... 328, 329 Checking ...................................................327 Disposal ....................................................330 Filter....................................... 330, 374, 377 Filter Disposal ...........................................330 Identification Logo.....................................329 Materials Added To ...................................330 Pressure Warning Light .............................109 Recommendation................... 329, 372, 373 Synthetic ...................................................330 Viscosity ........................ 329, 330, 372, 373 Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................118 Operating Precautions ...................................118 Operator Manual Owner's Manual .................................11, 469 Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 47 Overhead Console ........................................... 85 Overheating, Engine ......................................306 P Paddle Shifters ..............................................195 Paint Care......................................................363 Parking Brake................................................186 ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................239 ParkSense System, Rear ..................... 228, 233 Passive Entry ................................................... 27 Performance Features .................................. 101 Pets .............................................................. 177 Pinch Protection ....................................... 70, 73 Placard, Tire And Loading Information.......... 351 Power Brakes ...................................................... 367 Distribution Center (Fuses)....................... 290 Door Locks ..................................................27 Inverter........................................................88 Mirrors.........................................................47 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................86 Seats ...........................................................37 Steering.................................................... 208 Sunroof.................................................69, 71 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column................45 Windows......................................................67 Power Seats Forward .......................................................37 Rearward.....................................................37 Recline ........................................................38 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................. 149 Preparation For Jacking ................................ 297 Pretensioners Seat Belts................................................. 149 Q Quadra-Lift .................................................... 200 Quadra-Trac .................................................. 196 R Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 354 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)............ 343 Radio Presets ..................................................... 416 Radio Operation ................................... 414, 457 Radio Remote Controls ................................. 445 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................56 Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 346 Rear Camera................................................. 253 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 134 Rear Cupholders ..............................................86 Rear ParkSense System....................... 228, 233 Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................57 Rearview Mirror................................................46 Reclining Front Seats .......................................35 Recreational Towing...................................... 269 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 369 Refrigerant.................................................... 333 Release, Hood..................................................73 Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 144 Remote Control Starting System ...........................................19 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477 Remote Keyless Entry...................................... 14 Arm The Alarm............................................. 25 Disarm The Alarm........................................ 25 Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 16, 23 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........445 Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 21 Remote Starting System.................................. 19 Replacement Bulbs .......................................284 Replacement Keys.................................... 16, 23 Replacement Tires.........................................355 Reporting Safety Defects...............................468 Restraints, Child ............................................162 Restraints, Head.............................................. 41 Retractable Cargo Area Cover ......................... 78 Roll Over Warning............................................ 11 Roof Luggage Rack.......................................... 89 Rotation, Tires ...............................................361 S Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.........................178 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................180 Safety Defects, Reporting..............................468 Safety Information, Tire .................................347 Safety Tips.....................................................177 Safety, Exhaust Gas.......................................178 Schedule, Maintenance....................... 313, 317 Seat Belt Reminder .......................................110 Seat Belts ............................................ 144, 178 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 147 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 147 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ................................................ 147 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........... 149 Child Restraints........................................ 162 Energy Management Feature ................... 149 Extender ................................................... 148 Front Seat............................... 144, 145, 146 Inspection................................................. 178 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 146 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 147 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 145 Operating Instructions .............................. 146 Pregnant Women...................................... 149 Pretensioners ........................................... 149 Rear Seat ................................................. 145 Reminder.................................................. 144 Seat Belt Extender.................................... 148 Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 149 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 147 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 365 Seats ................................................. 34, 37, 39 Adjustment ...........................................34, 37 Easy Entry....................................................38 Head Restraints...........................................41 477 Heated.........................................................39 Rear Folding ................................................34 Reclining......................................................35 Seatback Release........................................34 Tilting...........................................................34 Vented .........................................................40 Ventilated ....................................................40 Security Alarm........................................ 25, 110 Arm The System...........................................25 Disarm The System......................................25 Selec-Terrain................................................. 205 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......... 374, 377 Sentry Key Key Programming ........................................23 Sentry Key Replacement...........................16, 23 Service Assistance ........................................ 466 Service Contract............................................ 467 Service Manuals ........................................... 469 Shifting.......................................................... 188 Automatic Transmission .................. 188, 190 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 145 Signals, Turn ...............................116, 180, 288 Siri................................................................. 462 Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 416 Favorites................................................... 418 Replay....................................................... 418 11 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478 478 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Browse in SXM ..........................................418 Favorites ...................................................418 Replay .......................................................418 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................... 360, 361 Snow Plow .....................................................268 Snow Tires .....................................................357 Spare Tires ................................. 297, 357, 358 Spark Plugs ......................................... 374, 377 Speed Control Accel/Decel..................................... 212, 213 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................218 Cancel .......................................................213 Resume.....................................................213 Set.............................................................212 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ... 211, 212, 214 Starting................................................ 181, 182 Button ......................................................... 17 Cold Weather ............................................185 Engine Block Heater..................................185 Engine Fails To Start .................................184 Remote ....................................................... 19 Starting And Operating ........................ 181, 182 Starting Procedures............................. 181, 182 Steering Power ........................................................208 Tilt Column ........................................... 44, 45 Wheel, Heated...................................... 44, 45 Wheel, Tilt ............................................ 44, 45 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 445 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls............................................ 445 Storage ............................................................84 Console .......................................................85 Door ............................................................84 Glove Compartment ....................................84 Sunglasses ..................................................89 Storage Bin ......................................................77 Storage, Vehicle......................................66, 363 Store Radio Presets ...................................... 416 Storing Your Vehicle...................................... 363 Sun Roof..................................... 69, 70, 71, 73 Closing.................................................. 70, 72 Opening ................................................ 69, 71 Venting .................................................70, 73 Sun Visor .........................................................49 Sunglasses Storage .........................................89 Sunshade Operation................................. 70, 72 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 129 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 330 System, Remote Starting .................................19 T Telescoping Steering Column ...................44, 45 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............65 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................78 Tilt Steering Column ................................. 44, 45 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 351 Tire Markings ................................................ 347 Tire Safety Information.................................. 347 Tires .................................. 180, 352, 357, 362 Aging (Life Of Tires)................................... 355 Air Pressure .............................................. 352 Chains ............................................. 360, 361 Changing ................................296, 302, 347 Compact Spare......................................... 357 Flat Changing............................................ 302 General Information ........................ 352, 357 High Speed ............................................... 353 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 353 Jacking............................................. 296, 347 Life Of Tires .............................................. 355 Load Capacity ........................................... 351 Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) ............................................. 112, 138 Quality Grading ......................................... 362 Radial ....................................................... 354 Replacement ................................... 302, 355 Rotation.................................................... 361 Safety .............................................. 347, 352 Sizes ......................................................... 348 Snow Tires ................................................ 357 Spare Tires .............................297, 357, 358 Spinning ................................................... 354 Trailer Towing ........................................... 265 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479 Tread Wear Indicators...............................355 Wheel Mounting ........................................302 Wheel Nut Torque .....................................367 To Open Hood.................................................. 73 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................264 Tow Hooks Emergency ................................................312 Towing ................................................. 258, 309 Disabled Vehicle........................................309 Guide............................................... 261, 262 Recreational..............................................269 Weight............................................. 261, 262 Towing Behind A Motorhome.........................269 Traction Control .............................................129 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................129 Trailer Towing ................................................258 Cooling System Tips ..................................268 Hitches......................................................260 Minimum Requirements............................264 Tips ...........................................................267 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................264 Wiring ........................................................266 Trailer Towing Guide ............................ 261, 262 Trailer Weight ...................................... 261, 262 Transfer Case ................................................347 Fluid ................................................ 376, 378 Maintenance .............................................347 Transmission ................................................ 190 Automatic ........................................ 190, 345 Fluid ................................................ 376, 378 Maintenance ............................................ 345 Shifting ..................................................... 188 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener

(Homelink) .......................................................79 Transporting Pets.......................................... 177 Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 355 Trip Computer ............................................... 106 Turn Signals.................................. 52, 116, 288 U Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity .................. 440 Phone Call Features ................................. 437 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone ....................................... 440 Uconnect Phone ................432, 433, 434, 435 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress............... 438 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress ................ 438 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 441 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name........... 437 Call Continuation............................. 439, 440 Call Controls ............................................. 437 479 Call Termination ....................................... 439 Cancel Command ..................................... 433 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ....................................................... 440 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing ...................................................... 435 Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device ............ 436 Dial By Saying A Number .......................... 437 Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device... 435 Far End Audio Performance...................... 441 Help Command......................................... 432 Join Calls .................................................. 439 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite.................................................. 436 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress ..................................... 439 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 437 Natural Speech......................................... 432 Operation.................................................. 432 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone ....................................................... 433 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device....................................................... 435 Pair Additional Mobile Phones.................. 434 11 20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 480 480 Phonebook Download ...............................436 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............439 Power-Up...................................................441 Recent Calls ..............................................438 Redial........................................................439 To Remove A Favorite ...............................437 Toggling Between Calls .............................439 Touch-Tone Number Entry.........................438 Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone........................................................440 Voice Command ........................................440 Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ....................437 Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features ............. 27 Passive Entry Programming......................... 27 Uconnect Voice Command ............................459 Uniform Tire Quality Grades...........................362 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)..... 79 Universal Transmitter ...................................... 79 Unleaded Gasoline ........................................368 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................147 V Vanity Mirrors ..................................................49 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 367 Vehicle Loading ............................................ 256 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....................12 Vehicle Storage.......................................66, 363 Vehicle User Guide In Vehicle Help ............................................13 Navigation ...................................................13 Operating Instructions .................................13 Searching User Guide..................................13 Viscosity, Engine Oil ............................. 329, 330 Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................... 459 W Warning Flashers, Hazard............................. 279 Warning Lights

(Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ................. 111 Warnings And Cautions....................................12 Warnings, Roll Over .........................................11 Warranty Information.................................... 468 Washers, Headlight..........................................57 Washers, Windshield ..............................54, 327 Washing Vehicle............................................ 364 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 359 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 359 Wind Buffeting ...................................69, 70, 72 Window Fogging...............................................66 Windows Power...........................................................67 Windshield Defroster .................................... 178 Windshield Washers .............................. 54, 327 Fluid.......................................................... 327 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 336 Windshield Wipers ...........................................54 Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 336 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................55 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................56 This Owners Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer. This Owners Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owners Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the drivers responsibility to comply with all local laws. This Owners Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation. WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

 

 

Whether its providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicles heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know youll find the app an important extension of your Jeep brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play Store and enter the search keyword JEEP (U.S. residents only). 2020 GRAND CHEROK EE OWNER S MANUAL 2 0 2 0 G R A N D C H E R O K E E U. S. Canada DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNERS MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits rservs. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque dpose de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 2 0 _ W K _ O M _ E N _ U S C _ N T h i r d E d i t i o n

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

R 1 L O W - S B - M L a b e l l o c a t i o n F o r 2 4 M Y D V D e s i g n - A S e c t i o n , M u l t i m e d i a D e s i g n D e p t . 2-3-33, Miwa Sanda-city, Hyogo 669-1513 Japan Mitsubishi Electric Corporation R e v i s i o n H i s t o r y Revision Date Description 1 2 2023/08/22 Updated for 24MY DV sample. 2023/11/09 Change label image FCC and ISED. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2

#37 F C C a n d I S E D Label Location Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 3

#37 C E Label Location Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 4

 

 

ny i IL NE AT \ A aoe iat 8 S\, BBS Mor Le nd innovanon Sense and Eccnarnic jot Canaria boence- exert RSS(s)|

[Bperaton is subect to the folowing ro ncitons (4) ffs device may not cause mf inlerference, and (2) fs device must cept ary interference recelved Incucing interference tat may cause undesired opera qt nora da checamovaten Sciences ef Devebpaemert ce Corpiotaban ot mere au bx condens skcories:

th Tasprel ne dt pas prdy de boule, (Fazuet ook accent 2iStinene ele outage ee scope fervent efncterneneat Fc 0 X00G000K Reece Sn ee Wan cee nce

|e oa Tee Tee 8 wre EE oooo0 CE

\ SRS ss AEE voco ara

 

 

ny i IL NE AT \ A aoe iat 8 S\, BBS

#29 POODOH A 7 BVOHOVOOIDOK FCA CODEPS. ooo A ao AO Sno Moot RtLoW MASE I TaMtAKO sey2cco 24sovne Sam, aan gira aura 18080 00 Seas 8 bn,

 

 

ny i IL NE AT \ A aoe iat 8 S\, BBS MOPAR. tuopet: Trewronoterte MADE WMERICO RegrTVROUNOOUAT This device complies with part 15 ofthe FCC Rules Operations subject othe folowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must accopt any interference Teceived inclaing interference that may cate Uindesired operation FCC ID XXX0KKK i waa eeepc tee

 

 

MOPAR. MODEL: RILOWAoM MADE IN MEXICO RegTYPIO1/1000467 emma A This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. poration is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC ID XXXXX000 FEA Coors BER OO ATE CODE : 000%

HW 30300 SW: O00 Wann sx mooooonosnoc Me MTR Inysusisi ELECTRIC CORPORATION

 

 

nig device comples wih part 16 of FCC Rules 1d Imovation, Science and Economie ondiions: (1) tis device may not cause artful interference, and (2) this device must cept any inerference receives, ncud Interference that may cause undesired operation snore! ges CNR Stonovaton ana OT Fea Cover taatenpx Ent Souci Braves teow Xam, Manse xe xa A Re XK XB, Dare Gove A er CR Sx. Sth tn naan

|MOoEL RILOW=a4

[MADE RNTHOONO pr NOM +4 XXX IHHKKAK Cc (3 ISODRESS 23:9 ANA SONGACTTYINOGO JAPAN

 

 

#29 DATE CODE : 2000 NOOK Ri 0000 SW 000% r.2402.240002 Som, MODEL RtLowanad Av zr2erauh dBm

(EXxx DORSOOG Ra map Then Vw RIK Wooo]

a yusen Ye mga men Ne PT |

RILOWs arm m9 wre nw MANUFACTURER: MTSUBSRIELECTRIG CORPORATION

[ADDRESS 79-9, MWA SANDA.CTYVOGO JAPAN won: XXXXXXX Cc

|U++

 

 

[This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules find innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS{s). peration is subject to the following two onditions: (1) this device may not cause iccept any interference received, including bee interference, and (2) this device must interference that may cause undesired operation. iaadtuine nineteen pista a ens beeen

[brauuneuteeseugentemaerengsratee Rleriincims cue nkewaacitaaes Eotaenuanneciuce IC XXX FCC ID : UJH-RALOW-SB BT.2402-2480MHz X Xam, WLAN:XX0X2XXMHE YOCKGE Mm XX XXXXMHZ 2xxaBm, IPETEL : RLVMINRXX 100 WOO000 XX 7XH2000000000C Px 2200KKXK Pox0x200000X. foro a0 000%

Pex 9000000%

IRCA PN XXXXX00000%

[FCA CODEPR xxXOKHAKX ISUBPLIER XXXKK SINS HRKXX

[DATE CODE Kexxx IW SRK IOS # KKK, MADE IN THAILAND]

MODEL:R1LoW|

XXX-XXXXXXXX__ wrsuerse MANUFACTURER wediecrnic MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION.

 

 

#29 XXII KK PRIOR, FGA CODEPH : XXX00KXX SuPruten a0 Sri 0000k AAD Sox DATE CODE : 1000 NOOK HK HRY 900K S| XXXOKK 7:2402.2480MH2 Sam, MODEL: RiLOW WLAN:2412-272uIH2 168m, MADE IN THAILAND '5500.5825MHz 8.56m, EXXX CXR nN TyORAA TWA Te NA WEA DNR n-yeann We Twn azoDAT Te FINA WOR RALOW:L anya wa 1 9 He

[MANUFACTURER WITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

[ADDRESS 23.33, MWA, SANDACITYHYOGO,JAPAN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC. Exo roo C my

 

 

MOPAR MODEL: RILOW TRemPo/2016716 MADE IN MEXICO Reg/TYPIO%/19/01/47 boo | Manic cma Nigeren0016 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rule Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC ID : UJH-RILOW-SB booaconnacncaa0x fxn OK 00000K Povo. IRCA PN. = 33000000000 IFA CODERS XXXHXIOOKK SUBPLIER XXX ISIN: XXXAK DATE CODE : 11XXX_ HW: XXX XX, SW! X0XXXX 2200000 X 70000030000 gf MITSUBISHI MANUFACTURER ECLECTIC MATSUBISHIELECTRIC CORPORATION L___\ \anoress2s.s.uma sanpacirvivocouaean |

MOPAR MODEL: RILOW TRemPo/2016716 MADE IN MEXICO Reg/TYPIO%/19/01/47 boo | Manic cma Nigeren0016 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rule Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC ID : UJH-RILOW-SB booaconnacncaa0x fxn OK 00000K Povo. IRCA PN. = 33000000000 IFA CODERS XXXHXIOOKK SUBPLIER XXX ISIN: XXXAK DATE CODE : 11XXX_ HW: XXX XX, SW! X0XXXX 2200000 X 70000030000 gf MITSUBISHI MANUFACTURER ECLECTIC MATSUBISHIELECTRIC CORPORATION L___\ \anoress2s.s.uma sanpacirvivocouaean |

 

 

Covered list attestation FCC application letter Kiwa RF_755_02 Page 1 of 2 15-02-2023 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3505 Certification Application Attestation Statements

<Company name>Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Work

<adress>2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city

<ZIP / Postcode>669-1513

<city> <country> Hyogo, Japan Subject: FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB To Whom It May Concern:

Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(i)

[Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works] certifies that as of the date of the application the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment1 prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. If the equipment for which the applicant seeks authorization is produced by any of the entities identified on the current Covered List, including affiliates or subsidiaries of the named companies, the applicant must include an explanation on why the equipment is not covered equipment. Additional Explanation: <N/A>

Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(ii)

[Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works] (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of this application, the applicant

- is /

- is not (3) identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment. Date:

City:

Name(2) :

Function:

Telephone number:

Email address:

Signature:

November 13, 2023 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city, Hyogo 669-1513 Japan Koichi Kuriyama Senior Manager, DESIGN-A Section Multimedia Design Dept.

+81-79-559-3505 Kuriyama.Koichi@bc.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp 1 - The Commissions Covered List is published by the Public Safety and Homeland Security Bureau and posted on the Commissions website. This Covered List, which is periodically updated, identifies particular equipment, produced by particular entities, that constitutes covered equipment. https://www.fcc.gov/supplychain/coveredlist .

(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent.

(3): double click on the appropriate box and select checked then OK Covered list attestation FCC application letter Kiwa RF_755_02 Page 2 of 2 15-02-2023 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3505 Revision Record Sheet:

Revision Section Page Date Remark(s) number number 07-02-2023 1st version 01 02 issued by RvM 1 15-02-2023 Changed Applicant to Company RvdM and added Subject: FCC ID:

Issued/modified by Function Revision Date

: Richard van de Meer

: Certification assessor

: 02

: 15-02-2023 Verified by Function Date

: Willem Jan Jong

: Team Lead

: 16-02-2023 Released by Function Date of release:

: Axel Gase

: Manager Quality Assurance

: 19-02-2023

 

 

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3505 Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Division, Application Processing Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21048 To whom it may concern Pursuant to Paragraphs 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules (47 C.F.R.) and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act, we request confidentiality for the documentation of the following products:

FCC ID UJH-R1LOW-SB Model name R1LOW-SB-M For the products listed above, we request permanent confidentiality for all applicable exhibits as there are:

Operational Description Block Diagram Schematics Parts Lists The above listed exhibits contain trade secrets and proprietary information that could be of benefit to our competitors. If you have any questions, please feel free to contact us at the address shown below. Sincerely, Signature Date November 13, 2023 Printed Name of Signee: Koichi Kuriyama Title: Senior Manager, Design-A Section Multimedia Design Dept. Company: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Address: 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city, Hyogo 669-1513 Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3505 Fax: N/A Email: Kuriyama.Koichi@bc.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp

 

 

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3505 Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Division, Application Processing Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21048 To whom it may concern Pursuant to Paragraphs 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules (47 C.F.R.) and in accordance with the FCC Public notice dated June 15, 2004 (DA 04-1705), we request short term confidentiality prior to marketing the device for the documentation of the following products:

FCC ID UJH-R1LOW-SB Model name R1LOW-SB-M For the products listed above, we request short term confidentiality for all applicable exhibits as there are:

External photos Internal photos Test setup photos User manual The above listed exhibits contain business sensitive information which we wish to keep confidential until the actual marketing of our device, that is planned for:

Short term confidentiality release date: 180 days after issue of Grant If you have any questions, please feel free to contact us at the address shown below. Sincerely, Signature Date November 13, 2023 Printed Name of Signee: Koichi Kuriyama Title: Senior Manager, Design-A Section Multimedia Design Dept. Company: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Address: 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city, Hyogo 669-1513 Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3505 Fax: N/A Email: Kuriyama.Koichi@bc.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Covered Equipment Attestation Letter For Certification Service in the USA Federal Communications Commission Equipment Authorization Division, Application Processing Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21048 To whom it may concern Pursuant to Section 2.911(d)}(7) of the Commissions Rules (47 C.F.R.} we attest as follows for the product listed below:

FCC ID , | Model name UJH-RILOW-SB R1LOW-SB-M We hereby acknowledge as follows:

i. both signees confirm that the point of contact accepts responsibility to act as a US-

American Representative on behalf of the applicant ii. the point of contact provides the physical U.S. address and email as listed below iii. both parties maintain the requirements of this letter for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. US Point of Contact Applicant/Approval Holder Company Name: |B-Lenhardt Inc. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works FRN: 0034258731 0015427370 Contact Name: Wilfried Klassmann Koichi Kuriyama Address: 2570 N. First Street, Suite 200 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city, Hyogo, San Jose, CA 95131, USA 669-1513 Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3505 Email: Kuriyama.Koichi@bc.MitsubishiElec tric.co.jp DocuSigned by:

Signatures: | Koichi Kuriyama Title: Senior Manager, DESIGN-A Section Multimedia Design Dept.

 

 

MITSUBISHI | MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Changes for the Better | en ee Date: September 28, 2021 FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB AUTHORIZATION LETTER To Whom It May Concern:

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works hereby authorizes Mr. Hideyuki Yamada, Project Manager, CPS of Bureau Veritas Japan Co. Ltd. (BV Japan), to act on its behalf in all matters relating to the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) application for equipment authorization in connection with the FCC ID listed above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Hideyuki Yamada, Project Manager, CPS of BV Japan on Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works's behalf, within the scope of the powers granted herein, shall have the same effect as acts of its own. If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Sincerely yours, Ah piso Ryuji Yoshinaga Senior Manager, Design -A Section Car Multimedia Design Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Email: Yoshinaga.Ryuji@db.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp

 

 

MITSUBISHI | MiTsuBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC SANDA WORKS CI | B 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan 1anges for ne eller Phone: +81-79-559-3952 Date: September 28, 2021 FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Permanent Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Application as outlined below:

Schematics Block Diagram Operational Description Software Operational Description Operational Description-Antenna Specification The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, Ryuji Yoshinaga Senior Manager, Design -A Section Car Multimedia Design Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Email: Yoshinaga.Ryuji@db.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp

 

 

MITSUBISHI | MiTsuBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Changes for the Better tee, Date: September 28, 2021 FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the commissions rules, we request short-term confidential treatment for the following information until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

External photos Test Setup photos Users manual Internal Photos Sincerely, Ryuji Yoshinaga Senior Manager, Design -A Section Car Multimedia Design Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Email: Yoshinaga.Ryuji@db.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp

 

 

ELECTRIC SANDA WORKS

- 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Chang es fe or the Better Phone: +81-79-559-3952 MITSUBISHI | MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

DFS device channel plan and software operational declaration Date: September 28, 2021 We, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works, declare that the device, FCC ID: UJJH-R1LOW-SB Model Name: R1LOW-SB-M, does not have Ad Hoc on non-US frequencies and/or on DFS frequencies. Also, the client software and associated drivers will not initiate any transmission on DFS frequencies without initiation by a master. This includes restriction on transmissions for beacons and support for ad-hoc peer-to-peer modes. Below is the channel / frequency plan for the device:

CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Frequency (MHz) } 2412 | 2417 | 2422 | 2427 | 2432 | 2437 | 2442 | 2447 | 2452 | 2457 | 2462 Scan Type Passive 5GHz Band W52/UNII-1 42 | 44 | 46 | 48 |

Frequency (MHz) | 5180 | 5190 | 5200 | 5210 | 5220 | 5230 5240 |

Scan Type Passive |

5GHz Band W53/UNII-2 CH 56 58 60 62 64 Frequency (MHz)| 5260 | 5270 | 5280 | 5290 | 5300 | 5310 Scan Type Passive 5GHz Band W56/UNII-2C CH 100 | 102 | 104 | 106 | 108 | 110 | 112 | 116 | 118 | 120 | 122 Frequency (MHz) | 5500 | 5510 | 5520 | 5530 | 5540 | 5550 | 5560 | 5580 | 5590 | 5600 | 5610 Scan Type Passive CH 124 | 126 | 128 | 132 | 134 | 136 | 138 | 140 | 142 | 144 Frequency (MHz) | 5620 | 5630 | 5640 | 5660 | 5670 | 5680 | 5690 | 5700 | 5710 | 5720 _Scan Type Passive 5GHz Band W58/UNII-3 CH 149 | 151 163. | 155 | 157 | 159 | 161 165 Frequency (MHz) | 5745 | 5755 | 5765 | 5775 | 5785 | 5795 | 5805 | 5825 Scan Type Passive MITSUBISHI | MiTsuBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC = SANDAWORKS

| 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Changes for the Better cones aeeedenes Also, on DFS channels, the WLAN driver in the device operates under the control of an AP at all times, except when in ad-hoc mode on US non-DFS channels. The device passively scans DFS frequencies until a master device is detected. The control of this functionality is not accessible to anyone under any conditions. Furthermore, the firmware is protected by a special signature and CRC checksum. Signature and CRC checksum will be calculated and verified before firmware upgrade. Unauthorized modification to firmware will lead to the failure of verification and thus firmware upgrade will not be allowed. Sincerely yours, Ryuji Yoshinaga Senior Manager, Design -A Section Car Multimedia Design Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Email: Yoshinaga.Ryuji@db.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp

 

 

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Phone: +81-79-559-3952 Description of Permissive Change Date: November 4, 2021 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attention: OET Dept. Reference: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB

(Original approval date: April 15, 2020.) Applicant: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB, originally granted on April 15, 2020. Detail of changes filed under this application:

1. WLAN channels 138,142 and 144 in the W56/UNII-2C Band was added to the already certified device by Firmware change. Sincerely, __________________________ Ryuji Yoshinaga Senior Manager, Design -A Section Car Multimedia Design Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Email: Yoshinaga.Ryuji@db.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp

 

 

 

 

 

 

ui Sea = CORPORATION

~ 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Changes for the Better recat ate Description of Permissive Change Date: June 18, 2020 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attention: OET Dept. Reference: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB

(Original approval date: April 4, 2020) Applicant: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB, originally granted on April 4, 2020. Detail of changes filed under this application:

1. Function as 5GHz access points is added to already certified device. 2. Model name is changed from R1LOW to R1LOW-SB-M from the certified device. Sincerely yours, he Kazuhito Funae Senior Manager, Design B Section Car Multimedia Manufacturing A Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works

 

 

MITSUBISHI | !TsuBIsHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC SANDAWORKS C B 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-Cily, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan hanges for the etter phorie:#04-791880.3800 Date: July 3, 2020 FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB |

To the attention of |

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the commissions rules, we request short-term confidential treatment for the following information until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

Test Setup photos Label Sincerely, Kazuhito Funae, Senior Manager, Design-B Section Car Multimedia Manufacturing-A Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation |

Sanda Works |

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC SANDA WORKS 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Changes for the Better phones 481-7EBBORuGE Date: March 17, 2020 FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Short Term Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the commission's rules, we request short-term confidential treatment for the following information until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorization in order to ensure sensitive business information remains confidential until the actual marketing of the device:

External photos Test Setup photos Users manual Internal Photos Sincerely, Hirotaka Minato Senior Manager, Design-B Section Car Multimedia Manufacturing-A Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works

 

 

MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC | SANDA WORKS 2.3-33, Miwa, Sanda-City, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan Changes for the Better Phone: +81-79-559-3952 Date: March 17, 2020 FCC ID: UJH-R1LOW-SB To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Vivision Permanent Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commission's Rules, the Applicant hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Application as outlined below:

Schematics Block Diagram Operational Description Software Operational Description Operational Description-Antenna Specification The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, Hirotaka Minato Senior Manager, Design-B Section Car Multimedia Manufacturing-A Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works

 

 

MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ELECTRIC SANDA WORKS CG B 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-Cily, Hyogo 669-1513, Japan hanges for the etter Phone: +81-79-559-3952 Special Power of Attorney To whom it may concern:

|, Kazuhito Funae of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works hereby appoint Hirotaka Minato of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works to represent me to act on my behalf to do any and all of the following Sign the following documents on my behalf and apply to FCC for the products

- Letter of agency and anti-drug

- Confidentiality cover letters

- Any other application document that requires a signature by grantee The right, power and authority in fact to exercise any and all of the rights and powers herein granted shall commence and be in full force and effective for more year from April 1, 2020 unless specifically extended or terminated by either party. Date: April 6, 2020 Place: Japan Signature Kazuhito Funae Senior manager, Design-B Section Car Multimedia Manufacturing-A Dept. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works